BMW F30 ActiveHybrid 3 Owners Manual

Contents Owner's Manual for
Vehicle
A-Z The Ultimate Driving

Machine
THE BMW ACTIVE HYBRID 3.

OWNER'S MANUAL.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 835 - X/13

ActiveHybrid 3 Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help
you make full use of the technical features available in your
BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or
Integrated Owner's Manual are located in the appendix of the
printed quick reference for the vehicle.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive.
BMW AG

© 2013 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English X/13, 11 13 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Addendum
ADDENDUM TO BMW ACTIVE HYBRID

3 OWNER’S MANUAL 1402926835
We wanted to provide you with some vehicle and for maintenance under
updates and clarifications with respect to the Maintenance Program during
the printed BMW Owner’s Manual. the applicable warranty and
These updates and clarifications will maintenance coverage periods, you
supersede the materials contained in are free to elect, both during those
that document. periods and thereafter, to have
maintenance and repair work
1. Where the terms “service center,” provided by other service centers or
“the service center,” “your service repair shops.
center,” “service specialist,’ or
“service” are used in the Owner’s 3. Where the Owner’s Manual makes
Manual, we wanted to clarify that reference to parts and accessories
the terms refer to a BMW dealer’s having been approved by BMW,
service center or another service those references are intended to
center or repair shop that employs reflect that those parts and
trained personnel that can perform accessories are recommended by
maintenance and repair work on BMW of North America LLC. You
your vehicle in accordance with may elect to use other parts and
BMW specifications. accessories, but, if you do, we
recommend that you make sure that
2. Where the text of the Owner’s any such parts and/or accessories
Manual contains an affirmative are appropriate for use on your
instruction to contact a “service vehicle.
center” or “your service center,” we
wanted to clarify that BMW 4. At page 7, under the warranty
recommends that, if you are faced section’s discussion of
with one of the situations addressed homologation, where it states that
by that text, you contact or seek the you “cannot lodge warranty claims
assistance of a BMW dealer’s for your vehicle there,” the text
service center or another service should read that you “may not be
center or repair shop that employs able to lodge warranty claims for
trained personnel that can perform your vehicle there.”
maintenance and repair work on
your vehicle in accordance with 5. At page 7, under the “Parts and
BMW specifications. Accessories” section, in the sixth
sentence, the word “cannot” should
While BMW of North America LLC, read “does not.”
at no cost to you, will pay for repairs
required by the limited warranties 6. At page 55, in the “Checking and
provided with respect to your replacing safety belts” section, the
Addendum
text beginning, “Have the work by your service center or a tire

performed only by your service mounting specialist.”
center . . .” should be disregarded
and the following text should be 10. At page 191, under the heading:
read in lieu thereof: “BMW “Approved wheels and tires,” the
recommends having this work term “Approved” should be
performed by a service center as it disregarded and in lieu thereof, the
is important that this safety feature term “Recommended” should be
functions properly.” read in its place. In addition, the
text of that section should be
7. At page 92, under the heading: disregarded and the following text
“Special windshield,” the paragraph should be read in lieu thereof:
beginning, “Therefore have the
special windshield . . .” should be The manufacturer of your vehicle
disregarded and the following text strongly suggests that you use
should be read in lieu thereof: wheels and tires that have been
“BMW recommends that you have recommended by the vehicle
the special windshield replaced by manufacturer for your vehicle type;
the service center.” otherwise, for example, despite
having the same official size ratings,
8. At page 169 under the heading: variations can lead to body contact
“Objects within the range of and with it, the risk of severe
movement of the pedals” and at accidents.
page 221 under the heading:
“Carpets and floor mats,” the The manufacturer of your vehicle
paragraph that begins: “Only use does not evaluate non-
floor mats . . .” should be recommended wheels and tires to
disregarded and the following determine if they are suitable for
language should be read in lieu use on your vehicle.
thereof: “The manufacturer of your
vehicle recommends that you use 11. At page 192, under the heading:
floor mats that have been identified “Snow Chains,” the text should be
by it as appropriate for use in your disregarded and the following text
vehicle and that can be properly should be read in lieu thereof:
fixed in place.”
Only certain types of fine-link snow
9. At page 190, under the heading: chains have been tested by the
“Mounting,” the paragraph manufacturer of your vehicle and
beginning, “Have mounting and are determined by the manufacturer
balancing . . .” should be of your vehicle to be road safe and
disregarded and the following text are recommended by the
should be read in lieu thereof: manufacturer of your vehicle.
“BMW recommends that you have
mounting and balancing performed
Addendum
Information about recommended 16. At page 199, under the heading:

snow chains is available from a “Service and Warranty Information
service center. Booklet for US models and
Warranty and Service Guide
12. At page 194, under the heading Booklet for Canadian models,” the
“Hood,” the sentence beginning, “If second paragraph should be
you are unfamiliar” should be disregarded and the following text
disregarded. read in lieu thereof:
13. At page 196, under the heading: The manufacturer of your vehicle
“Approved oil types,” the references recommends that you have
to “Approved” should be read as maintenance and repair performed
“Suitable.” Immediately preceding by your BMW dealer’s service
the “Gasoline engine” chart, the center or another service center or
following sentence should be repair shop that employs trained
inserted: “Add engine oils that meet personnel that can perform
the following oil rating maintenance and repair work on
standards: . . .” your vehicle in accordance with
BMW specifications. The
14. At page 197, under the heading: manufacturer of your vehicle
“Alternative oil types,” the text recommends that you maintain
preceding the chart should be records of all maintenance and
disregarded, and in lieu thereof repair work performed on your
should be read as follows: “If an vehicle.
engine oil suitable for continuous
use is not available, up to 1 US 17. At page 202 and page 205, where it
quart/liter of an engine oil with the reads: “Do not perform work/bulb
following oil rating can be replacement on xenon headlamps,”
added: . . .” The reference to that text should be disregarded and
“specification” should be read as in lieu thereof the following text
“rating.” should be read: “Xenon headlamp
work or replacement can cause
15. At page 197, under the heading: serious and fatal injuries.” In the
“Engine oil change,” the text should text that follows, where it reads:
be disregarded and in lieu thereof “[h]ave any work on the xenon
should be read as follows: lighting system . . . ,” the following
words should be read as preceding
that passage: “It is strongly
BMW recommends that you have
suggested that you . . . .”
the oil changed at your BMW
dealer’s service center or at another
service center that has trained 18. At page 210, under the “Battery
personnel that can perform the work replacement” section, the text
in accordance with BMW should be disregarded and in lieu
specifications.
Addendum
thereof the following text should be

read:
Use of recommended vehicle

batteries
The manufacturer of your vehicle

recommends that you use vehicle
batteries that it has tested and
recommends for use in your vehicle;
otherwise the vehicle could be
damaged and systems or functions
may not be fully available.
After a battery replacement, the

manufacturer of your vehicle
recommends that you have the
battery registered on your vehicle
by a service center to ensure that all
comfort functions are fully available,
and that any “check control”
messages of these comfort
functions are no longer displayed.
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ Mobility
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to 182 Refueling
page 226. 184 Fuel
186 Wheels and tires
193 Engine compartment
6 Notes
195 Engine oil
At a glance 198 Coolant
14 Cockpit 199 Maintenance
18 iDrive 201 Replacing components
26 Voice activation system 212 Breakdown assistance
29 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 218 Care
31 BMW ActiveHybrid
Reference
Controls 224 Technical data
36 Opening and closing 226 Everything from A to Z
51 Adjusting
61 Transporting children safely
65 Driving
77 Displays
93 Lamps
98 Safety
118 Driving stability control systems
123 Driving comfort
146 Climate control
152 Interior equipment
160 Storage compartments
Driving tips
166 Things to remember when driving
171 Loading
174 Saving fuel

Notes
Notes
The hybrid system of your Symbols
BMW Indicates precautions that must be followed
Your BMW is a hybrid vehicle. In addition to the precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
combustion engine, your vehicle features a personal injury and serious damage to the ve‐
high-voltage system that consists of an elec‐ hicle.
tric motor and a high-voltage battery among ◄ Marks the end of a specific item of informa‐
other things. tion.
This combination permits a particularly effi‐ "..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se‐
cient fuel utilization. lect individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac‐
tivation system.
Using this Owner's Manual ››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Orientation
Refers to measures that can be taken to
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
help protect the environment.
ular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in Symbols on vehicle components
the first chapter.
Indicates that you should consult the rele‐
vant section of this Owner's Manual for infor‐
Updates made after the editorial mation on a particular part or assembly.
deadline
Any updates made after the editorial deadline
for the Owner's Manuals are located in the ap‐
pendix of the printed quick reference for the
vehicle.
User's manual for Navigation,

Entertainment, Communication
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication and the short commands of the
voice activation system are described in a sep‐ Indicate, on certain parts or assemblies, that
arate user's manual, which is also included incorrect use of high-voltage equipment or
with the onboard literature. high-voltage components results in the risk of
fatal injury from electrocution.
Additional sources of information
The service center will be happy to answer any
other questions you may have. Vehicle equipment
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is This Owner's Manual describes all models and
available on the Internet: bmwusa.com. all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series.
6
Notes
Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, equipment ating conditions and permit requirements. If
is also described and illustrated that is not your vehicle does not comply with the homolo‐
available in your vehicle, e.g., because of the gation requirements in a certain country you
selected optional equipment or the country- cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle
specific variants. there. Further information can be obtained
This also applies for safety-related functions from your Service Centre.
and systems.
Maintenance and repairs
For any options and equipment not described
in this Owner's Handbook, refer to the Supple‐ Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
mentary Owner's Handbooks. materials and high-performance electronics,
requires suitable maintenance and repair
On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls
methods.
are arranged differently than shown in the illus‐
trations. Therefore, have this work performed only by a
BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐
ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐
ately trained personnel.
Status of the Owner's
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
Manual
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.
Basic information
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
policy of constant development that is con‐ Parts and Accessories
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to BMW recommends using parts and
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐ accessories approved by BMW for this
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐ purpose.
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
Your BMW center is the right contact for
those in your vehicle.
genuine BMW parts and accessories, other
products approved by BMW and related
Updates made after the editorial
qualified advice.
deadline
Any updates made after the editorial deadline BMW has tested these products for safety and
for the Owner's Manuals are located in the ap‐ suitability in relation to BMW vehicles.
pendix of the printed quick reference for the BMW can assume responsibility for them.
vehicle. However, we cannot assume any responsibility
whatsoever for parts and accessories that have
not been specifically approved by BMW.
For your own safety BMW cannot evaluate whether each individual
product from another manufacturer can be
Warranty used with BMW vehicles without presenting a
Your vehicle is technically configured for the safety hazard. This guarantee is also not
operating conditions and registration require‐ applicable when country-specific government
ments applying in the country of first delivery - approval has been granted. Testing of this kind
homologation. If your vehicle is to be operated may fail to embrace the entire range of
in a different country it might be necessary to potential operating conditions to which
adapt your vehicle to potentially differing oper‐ components might be exposed on BMW
7
Notes
vehicles. Such products could conceivably fail Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
to comply with BMW's own stringent quality designed to meet the particular operating con‐
standards. ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to de‐
California Proposition 65 Warning liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
California laws require us to state the following is operated under those conditions. If you wish
warning: to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
hicle to meet different prevailing operating
bile components and parts, including compo‐
conditions and homologation requirements.
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
You should also be aware of any applicable
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
warranty limitations or exclusions for such
State of California to cause cancer and birth
country or region. In such case, please contact
defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
Customer Relations for further information.
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
Maintenance
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐ road safety, operational reliability and the New
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐ Vehicle Limited Warranty.
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused ures:
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect ▷ BMW Maintenance system
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
water.
for US models
Service and warranty ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐ If the vehicle is not maintained according to
lowing warranties: these specifications, this could result in seri‐
ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty. Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐
ranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty. Data memory
▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐ Many electronic components on your vehicle
ited Warranty. are equipped with data memories that tempo‐
Detailed information about these warranties is rarily or permanently store technical informa‐
listed in the Service and Warranty Information tion about the condition of the vehicle, events
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
8
Notes
and faults. This technical information generally Event Data Recorder EDR
documents the state of a component, a mod‐
ule, a system or the environment: This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
▷ Operating states of system components,
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
fill levels for instance.
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐ standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
tion speed/ vehicle speed, deceleration, The EDR is designed to record data related to
transverse acceleration. vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐ short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
tem components, e.g., lights and brakes. less.
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐ The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
tions, e.g., deployment of an airbag, en‐ such data as:
gagement of stability control systems. ▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature. operating.
This data is purely technical in nature and is ▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐ safety belts were fastened.
mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over ▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
routes traveled cannot be created from this the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
pair services, service processes, warranty
claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐ These data can help provide a better under‐
mation can be read out from the event and standing of the circumstances in which
fault memories by the service personnel, in‐ crashes and injuries occur.
cluding the manufacturer, using special diag‐ EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
nostic tools. You can obtain further information nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are
there if it is needed. After a fault is corrected, recorded by the EDR under normal driving
the information in the fault memory is deleted conditions and no personal data, e.g., name,
or overwritten on a continuous basis. gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
When the vehicle is in use, situations are con‐ However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ceivable in which it might be possible to asso‐ ment, could combine the EDR data with the
ciate this technical data with individuals if it is type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
combined with other information, e.g., an acci‐ quired during a crash investigation.
dent report, damage to the vehicle, eye wit‐ To read data recorded by an EDR, special
ness accounts — possibly with the assistance equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
of an expert. cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
Additional functions that are contractually hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
agreed with the customer, such as vehicle lo‐ enforcement, that have the special equipment,
cating in an emergency, enable certain vehicle can read the information if they have access to
data to be transmitted from the vehicle. the vehicle or the EDR.
9
Notes
Reporting safety defects

For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in‐
jury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐
tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐
wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐
ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐
formation about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone
the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehi‐
cle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
10
Notes
11
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted
with the available control concepts and options.

At a glance Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle equipment ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment or country variant. This also applies
equipment that is offered in the model series is for safety-related functions and systems.
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
All around the steering wheel
1 Roller sunblinds 49 Active Blind Spot Detec‐

2 Rear window safety switch 48 tion 116
3 Power windows 47 Intelligent Safety 106

4 Exterior mirror operation 58 Collision warning with City Brak‐
5 Glove compartment on the driver's ing function 107.
side 160 Lane departure warning 114
Driver assistance systems
6 Lamps
14
Cockpit At a glance
Front fog lamps 96 Reduce distance 126
Parking lamps 93 Increase distance 126
Low beams 93 Cruise control rocker switch 131, 125

9 Instrument cluster 77
Automatic headlamp con‐ 10 Steering wheel buttons, right
trol 94
Entertainment source
Daytime running lights 94
Adaptive Light Control 94
Volume
High-beam Assistant 95
Instrument lighting 96
Voice activation 26
7 Steering column stalk, left

Telephone, see user's manual for
Turn signal 70 Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication
High beams, head‐ Thumbwheel for selection lists 87

lamp flasher 70 11 Steering column stalk, right
High-beam Assistant 95 Windshield wipers 71
Roadside parking lamps 94 Rain sensor 71
Computer 87 Clean the windshields and head‐

lamps 72
8 Steering wheel buttons, left 12 Starting/stopping the engine,

switching drive readiness modes
Store speed 130, 123
and the ignition on/off 65
13 Horn
Resume speed 131, 123
14 Steering wheel heating 60
Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐

ing 130 15 Adjust steering wheel 60
16 Unlock hood 194
Active Cruise Control on/off, in‐
terrupting 123
15
At a glance Cockpit
All around the center console
1 Headliner 17 9 Parking brake 69

2 Control Display 18 10 PDC Park Distance Control 132
3 Ventilation 149 Rearview camera 135
4 Hazard warning system 212 Parking assistant 140
Surround View 134
Central locking system 39 11 Driving Dynamics Control 120
5 Glove compartment 160 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐

trol 118
6 Radio/CD/Multimedia, see user's manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐
12 Automatic transmission selector
nication
lever 73
7 Climate control 146
8 Controller with buttons 18
16
Cockpit At a glance
All around the headliner
1 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ 4 Reading lamps 96

quest 212
2 Glass sunroof, powered 49 5 Interior lamps 96
3 Indicator lamp, front passenger

airbag 100
17
At a glance iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle equipment Control Display
All standard, country-specific and optional Hints

equipment that is offered in the model series is
▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the
care instructions.
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional ▷ Do not place objects close to the Control
equipment or country variant. This also applies Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
for safety-related functions and systems. be damaged.
Switching off
The concept
1. Press the button.
The iDrive combines the functions of a multi‐
2. "Switch off control display"
tude of switches. Thus, these functions can be
operated from a central location.
Using the iDrive during a trip
To avoid becoming distracted and pos‐
ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's
occupants and to other road users, never at‐
tempt to use the controls or enter information
unless traffic and road conditions allow this.◀
Controls at a glance Switching on

Press the controller again to switch the screen
Controls back on.
Controller
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and create the settings.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller.
1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons and, depending on
the equipment version, with touchpad
18
iDrive At a glance
1. Turn. Press the but‐ Function

ton
TEL Opens the Telephone menu.
BACK Displays the previous panel.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Controller without navigation system

The buttons can be used to open the menus
2. Press. directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and create the settings.
1. Turn.
3. Move in four directions.
2. Press.
Buttons on controller
3. Move in two directions.
Press the but‐ Function
ton
MENU Open the main menu.
RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
MEDIA Opens the CD/Multimedia

menu.
NAV Opens the Navigation menu.
19
At a glance iDrive
Buttons on controller Selecting menu items

Highlighted menu items can be selected.
Press the but‐ Function
ton 1. Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
MENU Open the main menu.
Audio Open audio menu last lis‐

tened to, switch between au‐
dio menus.
TEL Opens the Telephone menu.
BACK Open previous panel.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
2. Press the controller.
Operating concept Menu items in the Owner's Manual

In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
Opening the main menu selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
Press the button. "Settings".
Changing between panels

After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
▷ Move the controller to the left.
The current panel is closed and the previ‐
ous panel is displayed.
The previous panel is opened again by
pressing the BACK button. In this case, the
current panel is not closed.
The main menu is displayed.
▷ Move the controller to the right.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the
A new panel is opened on top of the previ‐
main menu.
ous display.
20
iDrive At a glance
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐ 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
cate that additional panels can be opened. is displayed.
View of an opened menu

When a menu is opened, it generally opens
with the panel that was last selected in that
menu. To display the first panel of a menu:
▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly
until the first panel is displayed.
▷ Press the menu button on the controller
twice.
Opening the Options menu
Press the button.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
The "Options" menu is displayed. box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
The function is activated.
The function is deactivated.
Touchpad
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller:
Additional options: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is Selecting functions
displayed. 1. "Settings"
2. "Touchpad"
Options menu
3. Select the desired function.
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".
▷ "Interactive map": operating the inter‐
This area remains unchanged.
active map.
▷ Control options for the selected main
▷ "Browser": enter Internet addresses.
menu, e.g., for "Radio".
▷ "Audio feedback": the entered letters
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
and numbers are announced.
the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".
Entering letters and numbers

Changing settings
The entry of the letters requires some practice
1. Select a field.
at the beginning. In the entry, pay attention to
the following:
21
At a glance iDrive
▷ For the input of upper/lower case letters Changing settings

and numbers, it may be necessary to Settings on the control display, such as the
switch via the controller to the correspond‐ volume, can be made via the touchpad. To do
ing Input mode, refer to page 25, e.g. this slide to the left or right accordingly.
when the spelling of upper and lower case
letters is identical.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on Example: setting the clock
the Control Display.
▷ Always enter accompanying signs, such as Setting the clock
accents or periods so that the letter can be
clearly recognized. The possibility of input 1. Press the button. The main menu is
depends on the set language. Where nec‐ displayed.
essary, enter special characters via the 2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐
controller. lighted, and then press the controller.
▷ To delete a character, slide to the left on
the touchpad.
▷ To enter a blank space, slide to the right in
the center of the touchpad.
▷ To enter a hyphen, slide to the right in the
upper area of the touchpad.
▷ To enter an underscore, slide to the right in
the lower area of the touchpad.
Using interactive map and Internet 3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
The interactive map in the navigation system to display "Time/Date".
and Internet sites can be moved via the touch‐ 4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is
pad. highlighted, and then press the controller.
Function Controls
Move interactive map Slide in the corre‐

or Internet sites. sponding direction.
Enlarge/shrink interac‐ Drag inwards or

tive map or Internet outwards on the
sites. touchpad with the
fingers.
Display the menu or Tap once.

open a link in the Inter‐
net.
22
iDrive At a glance
5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐ Telephone symbols

lighted, and then press the controller.
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Wireless network reception

strength.
Symbol flashes: network search.
Wireless network is not available.

6. Turn the controller to set the hours and
Bluetooth is switched on.
press the controller.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and Roaming is active.
press the controller. Text message was received.
Check the SIM card.

Status information SIM card is blocked.
Status field SIM card is missing.

The following information is displayed in the Enter the PIN.
status field at the top right:
▷ Time.
Entertainment symbols
▷ Current entertainment source.
▷ Sound output, on/off. Symbol Meaning
▷ Wireless network reception strength. CD/DVD player.
▷ Telephone status.
Music collection.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
Gracenote® database.
Status field symbols
AUX-IN port.
The symbols are grouped as follows.
USB audio interface.
Radio symbols Mobile phone audio interface.
Symbol Meaning
Additional symbols
Satellite radio is switched on.
Symbol Meaning
Spoken instructions are switched

off.
23
At a glance iDrive
Split screen tions, phone numbers and entry points into the
menu.
General information The settings are stored for the remote control
Additional information can be displayed on the currently in use.
right side of the split screen, e.g., information
from the onboard computer. Without navigation system and
telephone
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even Only radio stations can be stored on the but‐
when you change to another menu. tons, refer to user's manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment, Communication.
Switching the split screen on and off
Saving a function
1. Press the button. 1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.
2. "Split screen"
2. Press the desired button for more
Selecting the display than 2 seconds.
1. Press the button. Running a function

2. "Split screen" Press the button.
3. Move the controller until the split screen is The function will run immediately. This
selected. means, for example, that the number is dialed
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen when a phone number is selected.
content".
5. Select the desired menu item. Displaying the button assignment
Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The key assignment is displayed at the top
edge of the screen.
Programmable memory
buttons
▷ To display short information: touch the
General information button.
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐ ▷ To display detailed information: touch the
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐ button for an extended period.
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
24
iDrive At a glance
Deleting the button assignments The entries are continuously compared to the
1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for data stored in the vehicle.
approx. five seconds. ▷ Only those letters are offered during the
2. "OK" entry for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: town/city names can
be entered using the spelling of language
Entering letters and numbers available on the Control Display.
General information
1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐
bers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete the let‐

ter or number.
Press the controller for an extended

period: delete all letters or numbers.
Switching between cases, letters and

numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case, letters
and numbers:
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or Move the controller up.
Without navigation system

Select the symbol.
Entry comparison
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered
and letters may be added automatically.
25
At a glance Voice activation system
Voice activation system

Vehicle equipment Using voice activation
All standard, country-specific and optional
Activating the voice activation system
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
equipment or country variant. This also applies 2. Wait for the signal.
for safety-related functions and systems. 3. Say the command.
The command is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
The concept This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
▷ Most functions that are displayed on the cates that the voice activation system is active.
Control Display can be operated by spoken If no other commands are available, operate
commands via the voice activation system. the function in this case via iDrive.
The system prompts you to make your en‐
tries. Terminating the voice activation
▷ Functions that can only be used when the system
vehicle is stationary cannot be operated Briefly press the button on the steer‐
using the voice activation system. ing wheel or ›End‹.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's
Manual to use with the voice activation
Possible commands
system. Most menu items on the Control Display can
be voiced as commands.
The available commands depend on which
Requirements menu is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system Short commands exist for many functions.
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐ Some list entries, e.g., Phone book entries, can
fied. also be selected via the voice activation sys‐
Set the language, refer to page 90. tem. Speak these list entries exactly as they
are displayed in the respective list.
Having possible commands read aloud

You can have the available commands read out
loud for you: ›commands‹
For example, if the "Settings" menu is dis‐
played, the commands for the settings are
read out loud.
26
Voice activation system At a glance
Executing functions using short Via short command

commands Playback of the CD can also be started via a
Functions on the main menu can be performed short command.
directly by means of short commands, nearly
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output
irrespective of which menu item is currently
if necessary.
selected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹.
List of short commands of the voice activation 2. Press the button on the steering
system, see Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ wheel.
munication Owner's Manual.
3. ›Disc ... Track ...‹, e.g., CD track 4.
Help dialog for the voice activation
system
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹
Setting the voice dialog
Additional commands for the help dialog: You can set whether the system should use
the standard dialog or a shorter version.
▷ ›Help with examples‹: information about the
current operating options and the most im‐ In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the
portant commands for them are an‐ announcements from the system are issued in
nounced. an abbreviated form.
▷ ›Help voice activation‹: information about 1. "Settings"
the principle of operation for the voice acti‐ 2. "Language/Units"
vation system is announced.
3. "Speech type:"
4. Select the setting.
Example: playing back a CD
Via the main menu
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the controller.
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output

if necessary.
2. Press the button on the steering

wheel.
3. ›Media menu‹ Adjusting the volume
The medium last played is played back.
Turn the volume button while giving an in‐
4. ›C D‹ struction until the desired volume is set.
5. ›C D drive‹ ▷ The volume remains constant even if the
6. ›Disc ... Track ...‹, e.g., CD track 4. volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
27
At a glance Voice activation system
Hints on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐
ment of a telephone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 212, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
28
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

Vehicle equipment Select components
All standard, country-specific and optional 1. Press the button.

2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle Info".
ment is also described that is not available in a 3. Press the controller.
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional 4. Selecting desired range:
equipment or country variant. This also applies ▷ "Quick reference"
for safety-related functions and systems.
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Integrated Owner's Manual
in the vehicle
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display. The equipment
and functions that are in the vehicle are descri‐
bed therein.
Components of the Integrated

Owner's Manual
The Integrated Owner's Manual consists of Leafing through the Owner's Manual
three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐
mation or access possibilities. Page by page with link access
Turn the controller until the next or previous
Quick Reference Guide
page is displayed.
Located in the Quick Reference is important
information for the operation of the vehicle, the Page by page without link access
operation of basic vehicle functions or for what
Leaf through the pages directly while skipping
to do in the event of a flat tire. This information
the links.
can also be displayed during driving.
Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press
Search by pictures the controller to leaf from page to page.
Information and descriptions based on illustra‐ Leaf back.
tions can be searched via search by pictures.
This is helpful, for example, if the description of
an outfitting package that cannot be named is Leaf forward.
needed.
Owner's Manual
Information and descriptions can be searched
by direct entry of a search term via the index.
29
At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Context help - Owner's Manual to the Programmable memory buttons

temporarily selected function
The relevant information can be opened di‐ General information
rectly. The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
Opening via the iDrive rectly.
To move directly from the application on the
Control Display to the options menu: Storing
1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive.
1. Press the button or move the control‐
ler to the right repeatedly until the 2. Press the desired button for more
"Options" menu is displayed. than 2 seconds.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
Executing
Opening when a Check Control Press the button.
message is displayed The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐
Directly from the Check Control message on mediately.
the Control Display:
"Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the

Owner's Manual
To change from a function, e.g., radio, to the
Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to
switch between the two displays:
1. Press the button or move the control‐

ler to the right repeatedly until the
"Options" menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4. Press the button again to return to

the function displayed last.
5. Press the button to return to the page

of the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To switch back and forth repeatedly between
the function displayed last and the page of the
Owner's Manual displayed last, repeat steps 4
and 5. This opens a new panel every time.
30
BMW ActiveHybrid At a glance
BMW ActiveHybrid
Vehicle equipment converts the vehicle's kinetic energy into elec‐
tricity. The current is stored in the high-voltage
All standard, country-specific and optional battery and is used to drive the electric motor.
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ Functions
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional Electric driving: eDRIVE
equipment or country variant. This also applies
Under certain conditions, refer to page 68,
the vehicle is powered only by the electric mo‐
tor.
Hybrid system Acceleration boost: ASSIST and

eBOOST
At a glance
Driving off and accelerating require a lot of en‐
ergy.
To optimize acceleration and to reduce fuel
consumption, the electric motor boosts the
combustion engine. To do this, the electric
motor uses the energy saved in the high-volt‐
age battery.
The ASSIST acceleration boost is automati‐
cally controlled and is not indicated in the in‐
strument cluster.
1 Combustion engine
2 Electric motor Coasting
3 Control-system electronics The engine is automatically switched off. This
4 High-voltage cables (orange) driving condition is referred to as coasting, re‐
fer to page 68.
5 High-voltage battery
6 Auxiliary battery, combustion engine Driving with the combustion engine:
DRIVE
The concept The combustion engine, refer to page 69,
The hybrid system makes it possible to opti‐ provides the primary drive power to move the
mize fuel consumption and driving characteris‐ vehicle. If necessary, the high-voltage battery
tics. is charged at the same time.
An electric motor assists the combustion en‐ The hybrid system always starts the combus‐
gine. In certain driving situations, the vehicle tion engine automatically.
can also be driven using only electric power,
thereby reducing fuel consumption. Energy recovery: CHARGE
In addition to this, the electric motor acts like The high-voltage battery of the hybrid system
an alternator: during braking and coasting, it is charged through energy recovery.
31
At a glance BMW ActiveHybrid
The electric motor acts as a generator and isting navigation data. Hybrid operation adapts
converts the kinetic energy of the vehicle into to the specific route sections. These may be:
electric current. ▷ Steep gradients.
Charging can take place in various situations: ▷ Arrival in the destination zone.
▷ When the vehicle is coasting if the acceler‐ Pay attention to the notes in Adapting to the
ator pedal is not pressed. course of the road, refer to page 84.
▷ During vehicle braking.
When exerting gentle pressure on the brakes, Display
the vehicle is only braked by the electric motor. The displays of the hybrid system, refer to
When the brake pedal is depressed further, the page 82, provide information about the cur‐
brake system is activated additionally. This is rent state of hybrid operation and show the
why only part of the brake energy is used to system activity in a chart.
charge the high-voltage battery when exerting
firm pressure on the brake. Energy-saving driving
Foresighted driving and the early reduction of To save energy while driving, read the follow‐
speed are important to make full use of the hy‐ ing information:
brid characteristics of your vehicle. ▷ Saving fuel, refer to page 174
▷ Using the hybrid system efficiently, refer to
Auto Start/Stop function
page 166
The Auto Start/Stop function, refer to
▷ ECO PRO mode, refer to page 175.
page 67, switches the combustion engine off
when coasting, braking and while the vehicle is ▷ Adapting to the course of the road, refer to
stopped. Convenience functions such as the page 84.
automatic climate control are supplied by the
high-voltage battery and can remain switched Safety information
on. Read the information on Safety of the hybrid
system, refer to page 216.
Auxiliary functions of the automatic
climate control
The hybrid system makes it possible to oper‐
ate the automatic climate control even with the
combustion engine switched off. In this way,
the interior of the vehicle can be cooled for ex‐
ample during a break in the journey by residual
cooling or even before the trip by auxiliary air
conditioning.
▷ Residual cooling, refer to page 150.
▷ Auxiliary air conditioning, refer to
page 150
Adapting to the course of the road

When the navigation system destination guid‐
ance is active, the hybrid system uses the ex‐
32
BMW ActiveHybrid At a glance
33
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of
your vehicle. All features and accessories that
are useful for driving and your safety, comfort
and convenience are described here.

Controls Opening and closing
Opening and closing

Vehicle equipment 3 Opening the trunk lid
All standard, country-specific and optional 4 Panic mode in alarm system, auxiliary air
equipment that is offered in the model series is conditioning
ment is also described that is not available in a Integrated key
Remote control/key
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐
trols with keys.
Press the button on the back of the remote
Every remote control contains a replaceable control, arrow 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2.
battery.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
The settings called up and implemented when
the car is unlocked depend on which remote ▷ Driver's door.
control is used to unlock the car. Personal Pro‐ ▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
file, refer to page 37. side.
Information on the required maintenance is The front passenger glove compartment con‐
stored in the remote control as well. Service tains a switch for separately securing the trunk
data in the remote control, refer to page 199 lid, refer to page 43.
At a glance Replacing the battery
1 Unlocking 1. Take the integrated key out of the remote

2 Locking control.
2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1.
36
Opening and closing Controls
3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐ Starting the engine or activating
ment, arrow 2. engine readiness with emergency
4. Insert a battery of the same type with the detection of the remote control
positive side facing upwards.
5. Press the cover closed.
Take the used battery to a recycling
center or to your service center.
New remote controls

New remote controls are available from the
service center.
Automatic transmission: if a corresponding
Loss of the remote controls Check Control message appears, hold the re‐
Lost remote controls can be blocked by your mote control, as shown, against the marked
service center. area on the steering column and press the
Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while
Emergency detection of remote pressing the brake.
control
Also in one of the following situations, the igni‐
tion can be switched on, engine started or Personal Profile
drive readiness activated:
▷ Interference of radio transmission to re‐ The concept
mote control by external sources. You can set several of your vehicle's functions
▷ Discharged battery in the remote control. to suit your personal needs and preferences.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by mo‐ ▷ The settings are automatically saved in the
bile devices in close proximity to the re‐ profile currently activated.
mote control. ▷ The remote control used is detected when
▷ Interference of radio transmission by the vehicle is unlocked and the stored pro‐
charger while charging items such as mo‐ file is called up.
bile devices in the vehicle. ▷ Your personal settings will be recognized
A Check Control message is displayed if an at‐ and called up again even if the vehicle has
tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start been used in the meantime by someone
the engine or activate engine readiness. else with another remote control.
The individual settings are stored for three
Personal Profiles and one guest profile.
Transmitting the settings

Your personal settings can be taken with you
to another vehicle equipped with the Personal
Profile function. Additional information is avail‐
able from the service center.
The settings are transmitted as follows:
37
▷ Via the USB interface for data transfer. Exporting profiles

▷ BMW Online. Most settings of the active profile and the
saved contacts can be exported.
Profile management This can be helpful for securing and retrieving
personal settings, before delivering the vehicle
Opening the profiles to a workshop for example.
A different profile can be called up than the
1. "Settings"
one associated with the remote control cur‐
rently in use. 2. "Profiles"
3. "Export profile"
1. "Settings"
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
2. "Profiles"
USB interface: "USB device"
3. Select a profile.
Called up profile is assigned to the remote Using the guest profile
control being used at the time.
The guest profile can be used to make individ‐
ual settings without affecting the three Per‐
Renaming profiles
sonal Profiles.
1. "Settings"
This can be useful for drivers who are using
2. "Profiles" the vehicle temporarily and do not have their
The current profile is selected. own profile.
3. Open "Options". 1. "Settings"
4. "Rename current profile" 2. "Profiles"
The current profile is selected.
Resetting profiles
3. Open "Guest".
The settings of the active profile are reset to
their default values. 4. Adjust the settings.
Note: the guest profile cannot be renamed.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles" Display profile list during start
The current profile is selected. The profile list can be displayed during each
3. Open "Options". start for selecting the desired profile.
4. "Reset current profile" 1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
Importing profiles
3. Open "Options".
Existing settings and contacts are overwritten
with the imported profile. 4. "Display user list at startup"
1. "Settings" Personal Profile settings

2. "Profiles" The following functions and settings can be
3. "Import profile" stored in a profile.
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online" ▷ Collision warning: warning time.
USB interface: "USB device" ▷ Exterior mirror position.
38
▷ CD/Multimedia: audio source listened to The system simultaneously engages and re‐
last. leases the locks on the following:
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle: settings. ▷ Doors.
▷ Driving Dynamics Control: sport program ▷ Trunk lid.
▷ Driver's seat position: automatically re‐ ▷ Fuel filler flap.
trieved after unlocking.
▷ Programmable memory buttons: assign‐ Operating from the outside
ment. ▷ Via the remote control.
▷ Head-up Display: selection, brightness, ▷ Via the door handles of the driver's and
position and rotation of the display. front passenger doors.
▷ Headlamp courtesy delay feature: time set‐ The following takes place simultaneously
ting. when locking/unlocking the vehicle via the re‐
▷ Tone: tone settings. mote control:
▷ Automatic climate control/Automatic cli‐ ▷ Depending on how the vehicle is equipped,

mate control with enhanced features: set‐ the theft protection is activated/deacti‐
tings. vated. Theft protection prevents the doors
from being unlocked using the lock but‐
▷ Navigation: map views, route criteria, voice
tons or the door opener.
output on/off.
▷ The welcome lamps, interior lamps and
▷ Park Distance Control PDC: adjusting the
courtesy lamps are switched on and off.
signal tone volume.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 46, is
▷ Radio: stored stations, station listened to
armed or disarmed.
last, special settings.
▷ Rearview camera: selection of functions Operating from the inside
and type of display.
▷ Side View: selection of the display type.
▷ Language on the Control Display.
▷ Lane departure warning: last setting, on/
off.
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection: last setting,
on/off.
▷ Daytime running lights: current setting.
▷ Triple turn signal activation. Via the button for the central locking system.
▷ Locking the vehicle: after a brief period or If the vehicle has been locked from inside, the
after starting to drive. fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the

Central locking system central locking system unlocks automatically.
The hazard warning system and interior lamps
The concept come on.
The central locking system becomes active
when the driver's door is closed.
39
Opening and closing: from Switching on interior lamps and

courtesy lamps
the outside
Press the button on the remote control
Using the remote control with the vehicle locked.
General information If the button is pressed again within 10 sec‐

onds of when the vehicle was locked Interior
Take the remote control with you motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti-
People or animals left unattended in a theft warning system, refer to page 47, are
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐ switched off. After locking, wait 10 seconds
side. Always take the remote control with you before interior lamps and courtesy lamps are
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle switched on.
can then be opened from the outside.◀
Panic mode
Unlocking You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button on the remote con‐
trol. Press the button on the remote con‐
The vehicle is unlocked. trol for at least 3 seconds.
Welcome lamps, interior lamp and courtesy To switch off the alarm: press any button.
lamps are switched on.
Opening the trunk lid
You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.
Create the settings, refer to page 45. Press the button on the remote con‐
trol for approx. 1 second.
Convenient opening
The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it
The remote control can be used to simultane‐ was previously locked or unlocked.
ously open the windows and the glass sunroof.
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
Press and hold the button on the re‐ up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available
mote control. before opening.
The windows and the glass sunroof open. In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk
lid can only be opened using the remote con‐
Releasing the button stops the motion.
trol if the vehicle has been unlocked.
Locking Do not place the remote control in the

cargo area
Press the button on the remote control.
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐
Locking from the outside mote control is locked inside the vehicle when
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside the trunk lid is closed.◀
if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot
The trunk lid is locked again as soon as it is
be unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
pushed closed.
edge.◀
40
Malfunction Using the door lock

If the vehicle can no longer be locked or un‐
locked with the remote control, the battery General information
may be discharged or there may be interfer‐
ence from external sources such as mobile
phones, metal objects, overhead power lines,
transmission towers, etc.
If this occurs, lock or unlock the driver's door at
the door lock using the integrated key.
For US owners only

The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Locking from the outside
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
erned by the following:
if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot
FCC ID: be unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
▷ LX8766S. edge.◀
▷ LX8766E. The alarm system is triggered when the door is
▷ LX8CAS. opened, if the vehicle is unlocked via the door
▷ LX8CAS2. lock.
▷ MYTCAS4. In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle

with the remote control or switch on the igni‐
Compliance statement: tion, if necessary, by emergency detection of
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC the remote control.
Rules. Operation is subject to the following Only the driver's door is unlocked or locked via
two conditions: the door lock.
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and Locking the doors and trunk lid at
▷ this device must accept any interference once
received, including interference that may To lock all doors and the trunk lid at once:
cause undesired operation.
1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle us‐
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to ing the button for the central locking sys‐
these devices could void the user's authority to tem in the interior.
operate this equipment.
2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas‐
senger door.
3. Lock the vehicle.
▷ Lock the driver's door using the
integrated key in the door lock, or
▷ Press down the lock button of the front
passenger door and close the door
from the outside.
41
The fuel filler flap can only be locked using the Trunk lid
remote control.
Opening
Manual operation
If an electrical malfunction occurs, lock or un‐ up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available
lock the vehicle using the integrated key via before opening.
the door lock on the driver's door.
Opening from the outside
Opening and closing: from

the inside
Locking and unlocking
▷ Press the button on the trunk lid.
▷ Press the button on the remote

control for approx. 1 second.
▷ With Comfort Access the trunk lid opens
Pressing the buttons locks and unlocks the with no-touch activation, refer to
doors and the trunk lid when the front doors page 44.
are closed, but they are not secured against
theft. Opening from the inside
Push the button in the driver's foot‐
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
well.
Unlocking and opening If the vehicle is stationary, the trunk lid opens if
▷ Either unlock the doors together using the it is not locked.
button for the central locking system and
then pull the door handle above the arm‐ Closing
rest or
▷ Pull the door opener twice individually on
each door: the first time unlocks the door,
the second time opens it.
Recessed grips in the interior trim of the trunk

lid make it easier to pull down the lid.
42
Keep the closing path clear Comfort Access

Make sure that the closing path of the
trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may re‐ The concept
sult.◀ The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐
ing the remote control.
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area All you need to do is to have the remote con‐
trol with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket.
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐ The vehicle automatically detects the remote
mote control is locked inside the vehicle when control when it is nearby or in the passenger
the trunk lid is closed.◀ compartment.
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
Locking separately tions:
The trunk lid can be locked separately with the ▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
switch in the front passenger glove compart‐ ▷ Convenient closing.
ment. ▷ Unlocking of the trunk lid separately.
▷ Trunk lid secured, arrow 1. ▷ Open trunk lid with no-touch activation.
▷ Trunk lid not secured, ar‐ ▷ Start the engine.
row 2.
Functional requirements
▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐
Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This
ence nearby.
secures the trunk lid and disconnects it from
the central locking system. ▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle.
If the glove compartment on the front passen‐
ger side is locked, the trunk lid cannot be ▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
opened. possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked ▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐
using valet service. The infrared remote con‐ mote control is in the vehicle.
trol can be handed out without the key.
Comparison with ordinary remote
Emergency unlocking control
The functions can be controlled by pressing
the buttons of the remote control or Comfort
Access.
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.

The trunk lid unlocks.
43
Unlocking Monitor the closing process

Monitor the closing process to ensure
that no one becomes trapped.◀
Unlocking the trunk lid separately

Press the button on the exterior of the trunk
lid.
This corresponds to pressing the but‐
ton on the remote control.
Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front Do not place the remote control in the
passenger door completely, arrow 1. cargo area
This corresponds to pressing the button Take the remote control with you and do not
on the remote control. leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐
mote control is locked inside the vehicle when
the trunk lid is closed.◀
Locking
Opening trunk lid with no-touch
activation
With Comfort Access, the trunk lid can be
opened with no-touch activation using the re‐
mote control you are carrying.
Two sensors detect a forward-directed foot
motion in the center of the area at the rear of
the car and the trunk lid opens.
Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, Foot movement to be carried out
with your finger for approx. 1 second.
Do not touch vehicle
This corresponds to pressing the button
on the remote control. With the foot motion, make sure there is
steady stance and do not touch the vehicle;
To save battery power, ensure that the ignition
otherwise, there is a danger of injury, e. g. from
and all electronic systems and/or power con‐
hot exhaust system parts.◀
sumers are switched off before locking the ve‐
hicle. 1. Place in the center behind the vehicle,
about arm's length from the trunk lid.
Convenient closing 2. Move a foot in the direction of travel as far
under the vehicle as possible and immedi‐
Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2,
ately pull it back. With this movement, the
with the finger and hold it down.
In addition to locking, the windows and the
glass sunroof are closed.
44
leg must pass through the ranges of both Adjusting

sensors.
Unlocking
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Select symbol or "Unlock button:"
4. Select the desired function:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Opening Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it
locks the entire vehicle.
was previously locked or unlocked.
▷ "All doors"
up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available The entire vehicle is unlocked.
before opening. Depending on how the vehicle is equipped or
Before the opening, the hazard warning sys‐ the country-specific variant, you can set
tem flashes. whether the doors are also unlocked with the
button on the remote control.
Preventing inadvertent opening
In situations where the trunk lid should is Confirmation signals from the vehicle
not to be opened with no-touch activation, en‐
sure that the remote control is located beyond
currently in use.
the range of the sensor, at least 5 ft/1.50 m
from the rear of the car. 1. "Settings"
Otherwise, the trunk lid may be opened inad‐ 2. "Doors/key"
vertently, for example by an unintentional or 3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐
misinterpreted movement of the foot.◀ mation signals.
▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"
Malfunction
▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"
Comfort Access may not function properly if it
experiences interference from external sour‐ Automatic locking
ces such as mobile phones, metal objects,
overhead power lines, transmission towers,
currently in use.
etc.
In this case, open or close the vehicle using the 1. "Settings"
buttons on the remote control or use the 2. "Doors/key"
integrated key in the door lock. 3. Select the desired function:
If there is a malfunction, open the trunk lid with ▷ "Lock if no door is opened"
the remote control button or with the button on
the trunk lid.
45
The vehicle locks automatically after a The alarm system briefly indicates tampering:
short period of time if a door is not ▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.
opened.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐
▷ "Lock after start driving" tem.
The vehicle locks automatically after ▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.
you drive away.
Arming and disarming the alarm
Retrieving the seat and mirror settings system
The driver's seat and exterior mirror positions
used last are stored for the remote control cur‐ General information
rently in use. When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either
When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions with the remote control or via the Comfort Ac‐
are automatically retrieved if this function was cess at the door lock, the alarm system is
activated. armed or disarmed at the same time.
Pinch hazard when moving back the seat
Door lock and armed alarm system
If this function is used, first make sure
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
that the footwell behind the driver's seat is
opened, if the vehicle is unlocked via the door
empty. Otherwise, people can be injured or ob‐
lock.
jects damaged when the seat is moved back.◀
In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle
The adjustment procedure is interrupted: with the remote control or switch on the igni‐
▷ When a seat position switch is pressed. tion, if necessary, by emergency detection of
▷ When a button of the seat and mirror mem‐ the remote control.
ory is pressed.
Trunk lid and armed alarm system
Activating the setting The trunk lid can be opened even when the
1. "Settings" alarm system is armed.
2. "Doors/key" Press the button on the remote con‐
3. "Last seat position autom." trol for approx. 1 second.
With Comfort Access the trunk lid opens with

no-touch activation, refer to page 44.
Alarm system After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and
monitored again if the doors are locked. The
The concept
hazard warning system flashes once.
The vehicle alarm system responds to:
In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk
▷ Opening of a door, the hood or the trunk lid can only be opened using the remote con‐
lid. trol if the vehicle was unlocked first.
▷ Movements in the vehicle.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐ Panic mode
tempts to steal a wheel or when towing the You can trigger the alarm system if you find
car. yourself in a dangerous situation.
▷ Interruptions in battery voltage.
46
Press the button on the remote con‐ Tilt alarm sensor

trol for at least 3 seconds. The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
To switch off the alarm: press any button. The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is
Switching off the alarm towed.
To terminate the alarm:
Interior motion sensor
▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote con‐
The windows and glass sunroof must be
trol.
closed for the system to function properly.
▷ With Comfort Access: If you are carrying
the remote control with you, grasp the Avoiding unintentional alarms
driver side or front passenger side door
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
handle completely.
sor can be switched off together, such as in
the following situations:
Indicator lamp on the interior rearview
mirror ▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on car-carrying trains, at
sea or on a trailer.
▷ When animals are to remain in the vehicle.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and

interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every is locked.
2 seconds:
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
The system is armed. onds and then continues to flash.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking: The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
The doors, hood or trunk lid is not closed sor are switched off until the vehicle is locked
properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐ again.
cured.
After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp
flashes continuously. Interior motion sen‐ Power windows
sor and tilt alarm sensor are not active.
▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐ General information
ing:
Take the remote control with you
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
Take the remote control with you when
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐
until the engine ignition is switched on, but ple, cannot operate the power windows and in‐
no longer than approx. 5 minutes: jure themselves.◀
An alarm has been triggered.
47
The window reopens slightly.

Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
tection
Even with the pinch protection system, check
that the window's closing path is clear; other‐
wise, the closing action may not stop in certain
situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀
No window accessories
Opening Do not install any accessories in the

range of movement of the windows; otherwise,
▷ Press the switch to the resistance the pinch protection system will be impaired.◀
point.
The window opens while the switch is held. Closing without the pinch protection
system
▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐ Keep the closing path clear
ance point. Monitor the closing process and make
The window opens automatically. sure that the closing path of the window is
Pressing the switch again stops the motion. clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Convenient opening, refer to page 40, via the For example, if there is an external danger or if
remote control. ice on the windows prevents a window from
closing normally, proceed as follows:
Closing
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point
Keep the closing path clear and hold it there.
Monitor the closing process and make The pinch protection is limited and the
sure that the closing path of the window is window reopens slightly if the closing force
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ exceeds a certain value.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
point. there.
The window closes while the switch is The window closes without pinch protec‐
held. tion.
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance Safety switch

point. The safety switch in the driver's door can be
The window closes automatically. used to prevent children, for example, from
Pressing the switch stops the motion. opening and closing the rear windows using
the switches in the rear.
Pinch protection system
Switching on and off
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as
a window closes, the closing action is inter‐ Press the button.
rupted.
48
The LED lights up if the safety function is Glass sunroof, powered

switched on.
General information
Safety switch for rear operation
The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐
Press the safety switch when transport‐ tion is switched on.
ing children in the rear; otherwise, injury may
result if the windows are closed without super‐ Keep the closing path clear
vision.◀ Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof
is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Roller sunblinds Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
Roller sunblind for rear window
leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐
ple, cannot operate the roof and injure them‐
General information
selves.◀
If you are no longer able to move the roller sun‐
blind for the rear window after having activated
it a number of times in a row, the system is
blocked for a limited time to prevent overheat‐
ing. Let the system cool.
The roller sunblind for the rear window cannot
be moved at low interior temperatures.
Extending or retracting roller blind for

rear window
Press the button.
Tilting the glass sunroof
Push switch upward briefly.
Roller sunblinds for the rear side ▷ Closed roof is tilted open.
windows
▷ The opened roof closes until
Pull out the roller sunblind at the loop and hook it is in its tilted position. The
it onto the bracket. sliding visor stays com‐
Do not open the window while the roller pletely open.
sunblind is raised.
Do not open the window while the roller sun‐ Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
blind is raised; otherwise, there is a risk of sliding visor together
damage at high speeds that may result in per‐
▷ Slide switch back to the re‐
sonal injury.◀
sistance point and hold.
Glass sunroof and sliding vi‐
sor open together as long as
the switch is held down.
▷ Press switch back past the resistance
point.
49
The glass sunroof and sliding visor open Pinch protection is limited and the roof re‐
automatically. Pressing the switch again opens slightly if the closing force exceeds
stops the opening motion. a certain value.
2. Press the switch forward again beyond the
Analogously, the glass sunroof is closed by
resistance point and hold until the roof
sliding the switch forward.
closes without pinch protection. Make sure
The sliding visor remains open and can be that the closing area is clear.
closed by hand.
Convenient operation, refer to page 40, via the Closing from the raised position
remote control. without pinch protection
Convenient closing, refer to page 44, with If there is an external danger, push the switch
Comfort Access. forward past the resistance point and hold it.
The roof closes without pinch protection.
Comfort position
Stops the roof in the comfort position if the Initializing after a power failure
roof is not fully open. This reduces wind noise After a power failure during the opening or
in the passenger compartment. closing process, the roof can only be operated
If desired, continue the movement by pressing to a limited extent.
the switch.
Initializing the system
Pinch protection system The system can be initialized when the vehicle
If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐ is stationary and the engine is running.
roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐ During the initialization, the roof closes without
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately pinch protection.
the middle of the opening in the roof, or from
the tilted position during closing. Keep the closing path clear
The glass sunroof opens again slightly. Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐ is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
tection
Despite the pinch protection system, check Press the switch up and hold it
that the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise, until the initialization is com‐
the closing action may not be interrupted in plete:
certain extreme situations, such as when thin ▷ Initialization begins within
objects are present.◀ 15 seconds and is com‐
pleted when the sunroof is
Closing from the open position completely closed.
without pinch protection ▷ The roof closes without pinch protection.
For example, if there is an external danger, pro‐
ceed as follows:
1. Press the switch forward beyond the re‐

sistance point and hold.
50
Adjusting Controls
Adjusting
Vehicle equipment Manually adjustable seats
All standard, country-specific and optional At a glance

Sitting safely
The ideal seating position can make a vital 1 Forward/backward
contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
2 Thigh support
The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with: 3 Seat tilt
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 54. 4 Backrest width
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 55. 5 Lumbar support
▷ Airbags, refer to page 98. 6 Height

7 Backrest tilt
Seats Forward/backward
General information
Do not adjust the seat while driving
Do not adjust the driver's seat while driv‐
ing, or the seat could respond with unexpected
movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle
control could lead to an accident.◀
Do not incline the backrest too far to the

rear
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired
Also on the front passenger side, do not incline direction.
the backrest on the front passenger side too
far to the rear during driving, or there is a risk of After releasing the lever, move the seat for‐
slipping under the safety belt in the event of an ward or back slightly to make sure it engages
accident. This would eliminate the protection properly.
normally provided by the belt.◀
51
Controls Adjusting
Height Electrically adjustable seats
At a glance
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat

or lift it off, as necessary.
1 Seat and mirror memory
Backrest tilt 2 Backrest width
3 Lumbar support
4 Backrest tilt
5 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
Note
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
for the remote control currently in use. When
the vehicle is unlocked via the remote control,
the position is automatically retrieved if the
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the
function, refer to page 46, is activated for this
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
purpose.
Seat tilt Adjustments in detail

1. Forward/back.
Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired

tilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weight
to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat
engages properly.
52
Adjusting Controls
2. Height. Thigh support
3. Seat tilt. Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust
the thigh support.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in such a way that it supports the lumbar
region of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section
of the switch.
4. Backrest tilt. The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the switch.
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Backrest width
Change the width of the back‐
rest using the side wings to ad‐
just the lateral support.
53
Controls Adjusting
Front seat heating If the drive is continued within approx. 15 mi‐

nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐
cally with the temperature selected last.
When ECO PRO, refer to page 175, is acti‐
vated, the heater output is reduced.
Switching off
Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Switching on
Press the button once for each tem‐ Safety belts
perature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when Seats with safety belt
three LEDs are lit. The vehicle has five seats, each of which is
If the drive is continued within approx. 15 mi‐ equipped with a safety belt.
nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐
cally with the temperature selected last. Number of safety belts
When ECO PRO, refer to page 175, is acti‐ Your vehicle has been fitted with five safety
vated, the heater output is reduced. belts for the safety of you and your passen‐
gers. However, they can only offer protection
when adjusted correctly.
Switching off
Press the button longer. Hints
The LEDs go out. Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving away.
Rear seat heating To protect the occupants, the belt locking trig‐
gers early. Slowly guide the belt out of the
holder when applying it.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
▷ The shoulder strap's anchorage point will
be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐
ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
▷ The two outer safety belt buckles,
integrated into the rear seat, are for pas‐
Switching on sengers sitting on the left and right.
Press the button once for each tem‐ ▷ The center rear seat belt buckle is solely
perature level. intended for the center passenger.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
54
Adjusting Controls
One person per safety belt Safety belt reminder for driver's and
Never allow more than one person to passenger's seat
wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐
small children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀ nal sounds. Make sure that the safety
belts are positioned correctly. The
Putting on the belt
safety belt reminder is active at speeds above
Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be activated
across the lap and shoulders, as close to the if objects are placed on the front passenger
body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies seat.
low around the hips in the lap area and does
not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt
can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal Damage to safety belts
impact and injure the abdomen. In the case of strain caused by accidents or
The safety belt must not lie across the neck, damage:
rub on sharp edges, be routed over breakable Have the safety belts, including the safety belt
objects, or be pinched.◀ tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors
checked.
Reduction of restraining effect
Checking and replacing safety belts
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, and pull
the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the Have the work performed only by your
tension. Make sure that the belt is not jammed; service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured
otherwise, the belt can be damaged and the that this safety feature will function properly.◀
restraining effect reduced.◀
Buckling the belt Head restraints in the front

Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an in‐
creased risk of injury in an accident.◀
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle. Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
Unbuckling the belt approximately at ear level.
1. Hold the belt firmly.
Distance
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
3. Guide the belt back into its reel.
is as close as possible to the back of the head.
If necessary, adjust the distance by adjusting
the tilt of the backrest.
55
Controls Adjusting
Adjusting the height
1. Pull the head restraint upward as far as

possible.
▷ To raise: pull.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
head restraint out completely.
push the head restraint down.
Before transporting passengers
Tilt Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐

porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐
Three different tilt positions are available.
tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐
able.◀
Rear head restraints

Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
▷ Forward: pull the top edge of the head re‐
straint forward, arrow 1. Adjusting the head restraint
▷ Back: press the button, arrow 2. The head Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
restraint folds as far back as possible. occupied seats; otherwise, there is an in‐
creased risk of injury in an accident.◀
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be Height
sitting in the seat in question. Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.
56
Adjusting Controls
1. Pull the head restraint upward as far as

possible.
▷ To raise: pull.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
head restraint out completely.
push the head restraint down.
The center head restraint cannot be adjusted Before transporting passengers
in elevation. Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐
porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐
tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐
Folding down head restraints able.◀
Extending/retracting head restraint
Only fold down head restraint if no pas‐
sengers are in the rear. Fold out retracted Seat and mirror memory
headrests again if passengers are being car‐
ried in the rear; otherwise, there is increased Hints
risk of injury in the event of an accident.◀
Do not retrieve the memory while driving
Do not retrieve the memory setting while
driving, as an unexpected movement of the
seat could result in an accident.◀
Keep the movement area unobstructed

When changing the seat position, keep
the seat's area of movement unobstructed;
otherwise, people can be injured or objects
damaged.◀
▷ To lower flaps: press the button, arrow 1,
and press down the head restraint, arrow 2.
▷ Fold back up: pull up head restraints.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
57
Controls Adjusting
General information 2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2

until the adjustment procedure is com‐
pleted.
Calling up of a seat position

deactivated
After a brief period, the calling up of stored
seat positions is deactivated to save battery
power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
Two different driver's seat and exterior mirror ▷ Open and close the door or trunk lid.
positions can be stored and retrieved for each ▷ Press a button on the remote control.
remote control. Settings for the backrest width
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
and lumbar support are not stored in memory.
Storing
Mirrors
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position. Exterior mirrors
3. Press the button. The LED in the At a glance

button lights up.
4. Press the desired button 1 or 2. The LED
goes out.
If the M button is pressed accidentally:
Press the button again.
The LED goes out.
Calling up settings
1 Adjusting
Comfort function 2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
1. Open the driver's door.
3 Fold in and out
2. Switch off the ignition.
3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2.
General information
The corresponding seat position is performed The mirror on the passenger side is more
automatically. curved than the driver's side mirror.
The procedure stops when a switch for adjust‐
Estimating distances correctly
ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
Safety mode than they appear. Do not estimate the distance
to the traffic behind you based on what you
1. Close the driver's door or switch on the ig‐
see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk
nition.
of an accident.◀
58
Adjusting Controls
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the Fold in and out

mirror setting is stored for the remote control
Press the button.
in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐
mote control, the position is automatically re‐
trieved if the setting for this function is active. Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.
For example, this is advantageous
Selecting a mirror ▷ In car washes.
To change over to the other mirror: ▷ In narrow streets.
Slide the mirror changeover switch. ▷ For folding back mirrors that were folded
away manually.
Adjusting electrically Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx.
The setting corresponds to the direc‐
25 mph/40 km/h.
tion in which the button is pressed.
Fold in the mirror in a car wash
Before washing the car in an automatic
Saving positions
car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or
Seat and mirror memory, refer to page 57 with the button; otherwise, the mirrors could
be damaged, depending on the width of the
Adjusting manually vehicle.◀
If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example,
press the edges of the mirror glass. Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
Automatic Curb Monitor
whenever the engine is running.
The concept
Automatic dimming feature
When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror
Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐
glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas‐
med. Photocells are used for control in the In‐
senger side. This improves your view of the
terior rear view mirror, refer to page 60.
curb and other low-lying obstacles when park‐
ing, for example.
Activating
1. Slide the mirror changeover switch

to the driver's side mirror position.
2. Engage transmission position R.
Deactivating
Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas‐
senger side mirror position.
59
Controls Adjusting
Interior rearview mirror, manually Steering wheel

dimmable
General information
Turn knob
Do not adjust while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement
could result in an accident.◀
Adjusting
Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by

the interior mirror.
Interior rearview mirror, automatic

dimming feature
The concept 1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the lever back.
Steering wheel heating
Photocells are used for control:

▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Functional requirement
For proper operation:
Switching on/off
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside Press the button.
rearview mirror and the windshield.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
60
Transporting children safely Controls
Transporting children safely

Vehicle equipment vated. Automatic deactivation of front passen‐
ger airbags, refer to page 100.
equipment that is offered in the model series is Note
ment is also described that is not available in a Deactivated front passenger airbags
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional If a child restraint fixing system is used in
equipment or country variant. This also applies the front passenger seat, the front passenger
for safety-related functions and systems. airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there
is an increased risk of injury to the child when
the airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐
The right place for children straint fixing system.◀
Note
Children in the vehicle Installing child restraint
Do not leave children unattended in the fixing systems
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐
selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the Before mounting
doors.◀ Before mounting child restraint fixing systems,
ensure that the rear seat backrests are locked.
Children should always be in the rear
Hints
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the back seat. Manufacturer's information for child re‐
straint fixing systems
Transporting children in the rear
To select, mount and use child restraint fixing
Only transport children younger than
systems, observe the information provided by
13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in
the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro‐
the rear in child restraint fixing systems pro‐
tective effect can be impaired.◀
vided in accordance with the age, weight and
size of the child; otherwise, there is an in‐ Lock the rear seat backrests in position
creased risk of injury in an accident.
Before installation of child restraint sys‐
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a tems on the rear seat backrest, set a backrest
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint tilt at which the childseat rests firmly against
fixing system can no longer be used, due to the backrest and securely latch all backrests.
their age, weight and size.◀ Otherwise, the stability of the child seat is lim‐
ited, and there is an increased risk of injury be‐
Children on the front passenger seat cause of unexpected movement of the rear
Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐ seat backrest.◀
straint fixing system in the front passenger
seat, make sure that the front, knee and side
airbags on the front passenger side are deacti‐
61
Controls Transporting children safely
On the front passenger seat Child seat security
Deactivating airbags
After installing a child restraint fixing system in
the front passenger seat, make sure that the
front, knee and side airbags on the front pas‐
senger side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front passenger airbags auto‐
matically, refer to page 100.
Deactivating the front passenger airbags
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
safety belt can be locked against pulling out for
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
mounting the child restraint fixing systems.
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there
is an increased risk of injury to the child when
the airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐ Locking the safety belt
straint fixing system.◀ 1. Pull out the belt webbing completely.
2. Secure the child restraint fixing system
Seat position and height with the belt.
Before installing a child restraint fixing system, 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
move the front passenger seat as far back as pull it taut against the child restraint fixing
possible and adjust its height to the highest system. The safety belt is locked.
position to obtain the best possible position for
the belt and to offer optimal protection in the Unlocking the safety belt
event of an accident.
1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.
Do not change the seat position and height af‐
2. Remove the child restraint fixing system.
ter this.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐
Backrest width pletely.
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
child restraint fixing system in the front pas‐
senger seat, open the backrest width com‐ LATCH child restraint fixing
pletely. Do not change the backrest width system
again and do not call up a memory position.
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil‐
Backrest width for the child seat dren.
Before installing a child restraint fixing
system in the front passenger seat, the back‐ Note
rest width must be opened completely. Do not Manufacturer's information for LATCH
change the adjustment after this; otherwise, child restraint fixing systems
the stability of the child seat will be reduced.◀
To mount and use the LATCH child restraint
fixing systems, observe the operating and
safety information from the system manufac‐
turer; otherwise, the level of protection may be
reduced.◀
62
Transporting children safely Controls
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors With a through-loading system:

The lower anchors may be used to attach the Position
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
Correctly engage the lower LATCH an‐
chors
Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have
properly engaged and that the child restraint
fixing system is resting snugly against the
backrest; otherwise, the degree of protection
offered may be reduced.◀ Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo‐
cated behind the indicated covers.
Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix‐
ing system, pull the belt away from the child
restraint fixing system. Mounting ISOFIX child restraint fixing
systems
Position 1. Mount the child restraint fixing system; re‐
fer to the user's manual of the system.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Child restraint fixing system with a

tether strap
Mounting points
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo‐

cated in the gap between the seat and back‐
rest.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, there are

two outer or three mounting points for child re‐
straint fixing systems with a tether strap.
63
Controls Transporting children safely
Note 5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it

down.
Mounting eyes
6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
Only use the mounting eyes for the up‐
per retaining strap to secure child restraint fix‐
ing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes
could be damaged.◀ Locking the doors and
windows
Retaining strap guide
Rear doors
Retaining strap
Make sure that the upper retaining strap
is not routed over the head restraints or sharp
edges and is free of twisting on its way to the
upper mounting point; otherwise, the belt can‐
not properly secure the child restraint fixing
system in an accident.◀
Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.

The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for the rear

Press the button on the driver's door if
1 Direction of travel children are being transported in the
rear.
2 Head restraint.
3 Hook for upper retaining strap This locks various functions so that they can‐
4 Mounting point/eye not be operated from the rear: safety switch,
refer to page 48.
5 Rear window shelf
6 Seat backrest
7 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to

the mounting point
1. Remove the mounting point cover.
2. Raise the head restraint.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the supports of the head restraint.
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
the mounting eye.
64
Driving Controls
Driving
Vehicle equipment ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
All standard, country-specific and optional started.
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ Ignition on
Press the Start/Stop button, and do not press
on the brake pedal at the same time.
for safety-related functions and systems. All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator and warning lamps in the
instrument cluster light up for varying lengths
Start/Stop button, drive of time.
readiness states To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
The concept electronic systems/power consumers.
The following ready states can
Note
be attained by pressing the
Start/Stop button: If the engine is switched off and the ignition is
switched on, the system automatically
▷ Radio ready state on/off.
switches to the radio ready state when the
▷ Ignition on/off. door is opened if the lights are switched off or
▷ Activating/deactivating drive readiness. the daytime running lights are switched on.
To activate drive readiness, press the brake
pedal. Ignition off
Press the Start/Stop button again, and do not
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
Switching radio ready state on/off
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go
The radio ready state is activated by pressing
out.
the Start/Stop button in the following situa‐
tions: To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
▷ When the engine is running.
electronic systems/power consumers.
▷ When drive readiness is activated.
Transmission position P with the ignition
▷ When the engine is switched off automati‐
off
cally using the Auto Start/Stop function
and the brake is not applied. When ignition is switched off, selector lever
position P is engaged automatically. When in
Some electronic systems/power consumers
an automatic car wash, for example, ensure
remain ready for operation.
that the ignition is not switched off acciden‐
Radio ready state is switched off automatically: tally.◀
▷ After approx. 8 minutes.
The ignition is switched off automatically in the
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐ following situations while the vehicle is station‐
tral locking system. ary and the engine is off:
65
Controls Driving
▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the Hints

low beams are activated.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
Do not leave the vehicle unattended with
completely, so that the engine can still be
drive readiness active; otherwise, it presents a
started. This function is only available
potential source of danger.◀
when the low beams are switched off.
▷ When opening and closing the driver door, Awareness of vehicle reduced when
if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled and driven in electric mode
the low beams are switched off. When driving in electric mode, note that due to
▷ While the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, if the lack of engine noise pedestrians and other
the driver's door is open and the low road users will not be as aware of the vehicle
beams are switched off. as they usually would with a conventional en‐
When the ignition is switched off, by opening gine. For instance, pay particular attention
or closing the driver's door and unbuckling the when maneuvering into and out of a parking
driver's seat belt, the radio ready state remains space.◀
active.
Activating drive readiness
Drive readiness 1. Close the driver's door.
When drive readiness is activated, the vehicle 2. Depress the brake pedal.
is operational. Activated drive readiness is the
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
equivalent of a running engine in conventional
vehicles. Deactivated engine readiness is Drive readiness is activated:
equivalent to switching the ignition off. ▷ Electric drive readiness, Silent Start or
▷ Starting the combustion engine.
Drive readiness in detail Electric drive readiness, Silent Start

The vehicle is ready for driving without starting
The concept the combustion engine.
The following are the different drive readiness
Silent Start is possible after activating radio
variants:
ready state if the conditions for electric driving,
▷ Electric drive readiness, Silent Start, refer refer to page 68, have been met.
to page 66
The vehicle is powered by the electric mo‐ Display
tor. READY indicates drive readi‐
▷ Starting the combustion engine, refer to ness.
page 66
The vehicle is powered by the combustion
engine. Starting the combustion engine
Enclosed areas
Do not let the engine run in enclosed
areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes may
lead to loss of consciousness and death. The
66
Driving Controls
exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an After parking the vehicle, you may hear noises
odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas.◀ due to operation of the hybrid system, such as
for cooling of the high-voltage battery.
Unattended vehicle
Do not leave the vehicle unattended with Before driving into a car wash
the engine running; doing so poses a risk of In order for the vehicle to be able to roll into a
danger. car wash, pay attention to the information re‐
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ garding Washing in automatic car washes, re‐
ning, set the parking brake and place the trans‐ fer to page 218.
mission in selector lever position P or neutral
to prevent the vehicle from moving.◀
Repeated starting in quick succession

Automatic Engine Start/Stop
Function
Avoid repeated unsuccessful attempts to
start the vehicle or starting the vehicle several
The concept
times in quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel
is not burned or is inadequately burned, posing The automatic engine start-stop function
a risk of overheating and damage to the cata‐ helps save fuel. The system switches off the
lytic converter.◀ combustion engine when conditions for elec‐
tric driving, refer to page 68, have been met.
The combustion engine is started with Acti‐ The ignition or drive readiness remains
vate drive, refer to page 66, readiness under switched on.
the following conditions: READY appears on the tachometer. If neces‐
▷ The drive system is not at operating tem‐ sary, the combustion engine starts automati‐
perature. cally.
▷ The temperature of the hybrid system is The combustion engine is also stopped during
too high. the trip when coasting or braking. This driving
▷ The high-voltage battery has an insuffi‐ condition, in which the vehicle is traveling with‐
cient charge. out power and energy recovery is not active, is
referred to as coasting, refer to page 68.
Driving away
1. Activate drive readiness.
Note
The combustion engine is not switched off au‐
2. Select transmission position D, M/S or R.
tomatically in the following situations:
3. Release the parking brake.
▷ The combustion engine is not at operating
4. Drive away. temperature.
▷ The transmission selector lever is in posi‐
Deactivating drive readiness
tion M/S.
After stopping the vehicle:
▷ High voltage battery is heavily discharged
1. Select transmission position P. or vehicle electrical system is heavily bur‐
2. Press the Start/Stop button. dened.
3. Set the parking brake. ▷ High stress of the automatic climate con‐
trol in the heating or cooling phase.
▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked.
67
Controls Driving
▷ The vehicle is being optimized for the cur‐ ▷ The high-voltage battery is sufficiently
rent driving style, for instance during the charged.
breaking-in period or after a service ap‐ ▷ Transmission position D or R is engaged.
pointment.
▷ The drive system is at operating tempera‐
▷ The hybrid system is malfunctioning. ture.
▷ The accelerator pedal is only slightly de‐
Safety mode
pressed.
An automatically stopped combustion engine
▷ The driver's door is closed.
does not start independently when:
Possible up to speed of approx. 35 mph, ap‐
▷ The driver's door is open and neither the
prox. 60 km/h.
brake nor accelerator pedal are depressed.
In ECO PRO mode, a speed up to approx.
▷ Unlocked hood.
45 mph, approx. 75 km/h is possible.
The indicator lamps come on. The combustion
engine can only be started via the Start/Stop Possible cruising range
button.
Depending on the charge of the high-voltage
battery, the vehicle can be driven using electric
Switching off the vehicle during an
power constantly for up to 2-2.5 miles/3-4 km.
automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle Coasting
can be switched off permanently, e.g., when
The combustion engine is automatically stop‐
leaving it.
ped and disengaged from the drive train. This
1. Press the Start/Stop button. driving condition is referred to as coasting.
▷ The ignition is switched off.
Requirements
▷ The radio ready state is activated.
Coasting is possible:
▷ The Auto Start/Stop function is deacti‐
vated. ▷ The high-voltage battery is sufficiently
charged.
▷ Transmission position P is engaged
automatically. ▷ Transmission position D or R is engaged.
2. Set the parking brake. ▷ The drive system is at operating tempera‐

ture.
Malfunction ▷ The driver's door is closed.
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer ▷ In COMFORT mode: when rolling at
switches of the combustion engine automati‐ speeds exceeding 35 mph, approx.
cally in the event of a malfunction. A message 60 km/h or when braking at speeds above
is displayed. It is possible to continue driving. 50 mph, approx. 80 km/h.
Have the system checked. ▷ In ECO PRO: mode, when coasting, with‐
out operating the brake, at speeds below
100 mph, approx. 160 km/h.
Electric driving: eDRIVE After the coasting, the combustion or electric
motor restarts depending on the operating
Requirements state.
Electric driving is possible:
68
Driving Controls
Driving with the combustion eBOOST

engine: DRIVE Accelerating quickly, such as when passing,
requires the maximum available power from
The combustion engine provides the primary the electric motor. To do this, apply extra force
drive power to move the vehicle. If necessary, to the accelerator pedal.
the high-voltage battery is charged at the
same time.
Energy recovery: CHARGE
Automatic start while driving
The combustion engine is automatically The hybrid system makes it possible to con‐
started under the following conditions while vert kinetic energy into electrical power when
driving: braking and coasting. This recovered energy
charges the high voltage battery. If necessary,
▷ Transmission position M/S is engaged.
this stored electrical energy is output to the
▷ The speed for electric driving is exceeded electric motor.
while accelerating.
The following conditions must be met to re‐
▷ The high-voltage battery has an insuffi‐ cover kinetic energy:
cient charge.
▷ The vehicle is moving.
▷ High voltage battery is completely
▷ Transmission position D, M/S is engaged.
charged, e.g., when driving downhill.
▷ The high-voltage battery is not fully
▷ During intense accelerations or on inclines.
charged.
▷ System-related requirement for hybrid
Energy recovery displays in the instrument
components.
cluster, refer to page 83.
▷ Adapting to the course of the road when
destination guidance is activated.
Parking brake
Automatic parking while driving
When reducing speed, the combustion engine Applying
is switched off when the conditions for electric The lever automatically engages after being
driving, refer to page 68, are met. pulled up.
The indicator lamp lights up red. The
parking brake is set.
Assistance for the
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
combustion engine
models
The combustion engine provides the primary
drive power to move the vehicle.
The electric motor provides assistance as
needed with additional propulsive power.
ASSIST
During normal vehicle operation, the electric
motor assists the combustion engine, depend‐
ing on the situation.
69
Controls Driving
Releasing Using turn signals
Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
the lever down. To switch off manually, press the lever to the
resistance point.
Hints
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
Use while driving
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
If on a rare occasion it is necessary to
use the parking brake while driving, do not use Triple turn signal activation
excessive force when applying it. When using
Press the lever to the resistance point.
it, keep the button on the lever depressed.
The turn signal flashes three times.
Otherwise, using excessive force when apply‐
ing the parking brake may cause the rear The function can be activated or deactivated:
wheels to lock, resulting in fishtailing.◀ 1. "Settings"
To prevent corrosion and braking control on 2. "Lighting"
one side only, lightly apply the parking brake 3. "Triple turn signal"
periodically while coasting, if traffic conditions
permit. Signaling briefly
The brake lamps will not light up if the parking Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
brake is engaged. it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
Turn signal, high beams, High beams, headlamp flasher

headlamp flasher
Turn signal
Do not fold in the exterior mirrors
Do not fold in the exterior mirror while
driving and when the turn signals/warning
flashers are working, or else the additional
flasher lights in the exterior mirror will no lon‐
ger be in the prescribed position and will be
difficult to see.◀ ▷ High beams, arrow 1.
▷ Headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
70
Driving Controls
Washer/wiper system Switching off and brief wipe
Switching the wipers on/off and brief

wipe
Do not switch on the wipers if frozen
Do not switch on the wipers if they are
frozen onto the windshield; otherwise, the
wiper blades and the windshield wiper motor
may be damaged.◀
No wiper operation on dry windshield Press the wiper levers down.

Do not use the windshield wipers if the The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
windshield is dry, as this may damage the sition when released.
wiper blades or cause them to become worn
▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
more quickly.◀
▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down
No wiper operation with wipers folded once.
away ▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
Do not switch on the wipers if they are folded
away, otherwise the hood or the wipers may be Intermittent operation or rain sensor
damaged.◀
The concept
Switching on Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the
wiper operation is preset.
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐
shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐
ror.
Activating/deactivating
Press the wiper levers up.

The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Normal wiping speed: press up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
▷ Fast wiping speed: press up twice or press
once beyond the resistance point. Press the button on the wiper lever.
The wipers switch to normal speed when
the vehicle is stationary.
71
Controls Driving
The LED in the wiper lever lights up and a wip‐ Do not use the washer system at freezing
ing operation is started. If there is frost, wiper temperatures
operation is not started. Do not use the washers if there is any danger
that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth‐
Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing reason, use antifreeze.
through an automatic car wash; otherwise, Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is
damage could be caused by undesired wiper empty; otherwise, you could damage the
activation.◀ pump.◀
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of Windshield washer nozzles

the rain sensor
The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐
cally heated while the ignition is switched on.
Fold-out position of the wipers

Required when changing the wiper blades or
under frosty conditions, for example.
1. Switch the ignition on and off again.

2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the
wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind‐
Turn the thumbwheel. shield.
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point
Clean the windshield, headlamps of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐
onds, until the wiper remains in a nearly
vertical position.
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
Fold the wipers back down
Before switching the ignition on, fold the
wipers back down to the windshield; other‐
wise, the wipers may become damaged when
they are switched on.◀
Pull the wiper lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
move to their resting position and are
In addition, the headlamps are cleaned at regu‐ ready for operation.
lar intervals when the vehicle lights are
switched on.
72
Driving Controls
Washer fluid washer antifreeze, according to the manufac‐

turer's recommendations.
General information Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain
the correct mixing ratio.
Antifreeze for washer fluid
Do not add windshield washer concentrate and
Antifreeze is flammable and can cause
antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure
injury if it is used incorrectly.
water; this could damage the wiper system.
Therefore, keep it away from sources of igni‐
Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif‐
tion.
ferent manufacturers, because otherwise it can
Only keep it in the closed original container result in clogging of the windshield washer
and inaccessible to children. nozzles.
Follow the notes and instructions on the con‐ Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.2 US
tainer. gal/1 liter.
United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer Automatic transmission with
fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
Steptronic
tainer. Use BMW’s Windshield Washer Con‐
Transmission positions
centrate or the equivalent.◀
D Drive, automatic position
Washer fluid reservoir Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐
Adding washer fluid ward gears are available.
Only add washer fluid when the engine is
cool, and then close the cover completely to R is Reverse
avoid contact between the washer fluid and Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
hot engine parts.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk N is Neutral
to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀ Use in automatic car washes, for example. The
vehicle can roll.
When the ignition is switched off, refer to
page 65, position P is engaged automatically.
P Park
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
drive wheels are blocked.
P is engaged automatically:
▷ After deactivating drive readiness when the
All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐ vehicle is in radio ready state, refer to
ervoir. page 65, or when the ignition is switched
Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con‐ off, refer to page 65, and when position R
centrate and tap water and – if required – with a or D is engaged.
73
Controls Driving
▷ With the ignition is off, if position N is en‐ After releasing the selector lever, it returns to
gaged. its center position.
▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled, the driver's
door is opened, and the brake pedal is not
pressed while the vehicle is stationary and
transmission position R or D is engaged.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that posi‐
tion P of the automatic transmission is en‐
gaged. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to
roll.
Kickdown
Press unlock button, in order to:
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Press on the gas pedal beyond ▷ Engage R.
the resistance point at the full throttle position. ▷ Shift out of P.
Engaging the transmission position

Engaging P
▷ Transmission position P can only be disen‐
gaged if the engine is running and the
brake pedal is pressed.
▷ With the vehicle stationary, press on the
brake pedal before shifting out of P or N;
otherwise, the shift command will not be
executed: shift lock.
Depress the brake until you start
driving
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after Press button P.
you select a driving position, maintain
pressure on the brake pedal until you are
Sport program and manual mode
ready to start.◀
Activating the sport program
Engaging D, R and N
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐

Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐ mission position D.
rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary.
74
Driving Controls
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐ In addition, the kickdown is deactivated.
vated.
eDRIVE electric driving and the Auto Start Ending the sport program/manual
Stop function are deactivated. Coasting to a mode
standstill and braking phases will be used Push the selector lever to the right.
more often to recover energy. The high-volt‐ D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
age battery will be charged more quickly.
Shift paddles
Activating the M/S manual mode
1. Push the selector lever to the left out of
transmission position D.
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it
backward.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, e.g., M1.
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
Once maximum engine speed is attained, M/S you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
manual mode is automatically upshifted as hands on the steering wheel.
needed.
If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are
used to shift gears in automatic mode, the
Switching to manual mode
transmission temporarily switches to manual
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ mode.
ward.
If the shift paddles are not used and the vehicle
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐ is not accelerated for a certain time, the sys‐
wards. tem switches back into automatic mode if the
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine selector lever is in transmission position D.
and road speeds, e.g., downshifting is not pos‐ ▷ Shift up: pull right shift paddle.
sible if the engine speed is too high.
▷ Shift down: pull left shift paddle.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
and road speeds, e.g., downshifting is not pos‐
sible if the engine speed is too high.
Sport automatic transmission: prevent
automatic upshifting in M/S manual The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
mode strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
For vehicles with Sport automatic transmis‐
sions, automatic shift operations are not per‐ Displays in the instrument cluster
formed, at maximum engine speed for exam‐
The transmission position is dis‐
ple, if one of the following conditions is met:
played, e.g.: P.
▷ DSC deactivated.
▷ TRACTION activated.
▷ SPORT+ activated.
75
Controls Driving
Sport automatic transmission: Launch A flag symbol appears in the instrument

Control cluster.
5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
The concept 3 seconds, release the brake.
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration Before using Launch Control, allow the trans‐
on surfaces with good traction. mission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes.
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding
Hints
conditions, e.g., wet pavement, when used
Component wear again.
Do not use Launch Control too often;
otherwise, this may result in premature wear of
components due to the high stress placed on
the vehicle.◀
Did not use Launch Control during the break-

in, refer to page 166, period.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Requirements
Launch Control is available when the engine is
warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving
of at least 6 miles/10 km.
To start with Launch Control do not steer the
steering wheel.
Start with launch control

While the engine is running:
1. Press button or select with the

Driving Dynamics Control Sport+.
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF
lights up.
2. Engaging the transmission position S
3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full
throttle position.
76
Displays Controls
Displays
Instrument cluster
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Fuel gauge 80 5 Engine oil temperature 80

2 Speedometer 6 Current fuel consumption 84
3 Indicator/warning lamps 78 7 Electronic displays 78
4 Tachometer 80 8 Display/reset miles 81
77
Controls Displays
Electronic displays
Overview, instrument cluster with enhanced features
1 Time 81 Navigation display, see user's manual for

External temperature 81 Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐
cation.
Date 81
2 Transmission display 75
Selection list, e.g., radio 87
ECO PRO 175
Speed limit detection 85
Hybrid displays 82
Computer 87
3 Messages, e.g. Check Control 78
Miles/trip miles 81
Service requirements 84
Check Control In addition, an acoustic signal may be output

and a text message may appear on the Control
The concept Display.
The Check Control system monitors functions
Indicator/warning lamps
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions
in the monitored systems. The indicator and warning lamps in the instru‐
ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐
A Check Control message is displayed as a
nations and colors.
combination of indicator or warning lamps and
text messages in the instrument cluster and in Several of the lamps are checked for proper
the Head-up Display. functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
78
Displays Controls
Overview: indicator/warning lamps Symbol Function or system
Symbol Function or system Safety belts.
Turn signal.
Airbag system.
Front fog lamps.

Steering system.
High beams.
Engine functions.
High-beam Assistant.
Parking brake.
Brake system.
Parking lamps, headlamp control.
In Canadian models
Parking brake.
Active Cruise Control.
Brake system.
ABS Antilock Brake System.

Vehicle detection, Active Cruise
Control: collision warning.
ABS Antilock Brake System in
Pedestrian warning. Canadian models.
At least one Check Control mes‐

Speed limit, adjustable. sage is displayed or is stored (sym‐
bol in display).
Cruise control.
Text messages
Text messages in combination with a symbol
Lane departure warning. in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con‐
trol message and the meaning of the indicator
and warning lamps.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
Supplementary text messages
Additional information, such as on the cause of
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is a fault or the required action, can be called up
deactivated or DTC Dynamic Trac‐ via Check Control.
tion Control is activated.
The supplementary text of urgent messages is
Tire Pressure Monitor. automatically displayed on the Control Display.
Flat Tire Monitor.
79
Controls Displays
Symbols 3. "Check Control"

Depending on the Check Control message, the 4. Select the text message.
following functions can be selected.
▷ "Owner's Manual" Messages after trip completion
Display additional information about the Special messages that are displayed during
Check Control message in the Integrated driving are displayed again after the ignition is
Owner's Manual. switched off.
▷ "Service request"
Contact your service center. Fuel gauge
▷ "Roadside Assistance"
The vehicle inclination may
Contact Roadside Assistance. cause the display to vary.
US models: the arrow beside the
Hiding Check Control messages
fuel pump symbol shows which
side of the vehicle the fuel filler
flap is on.
Hints on refueling, refer to page 182.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter‐
Press the onboard computer button on the rupted to protect the engine.
turn signal lever.
▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐

played continuously and are not cleared
Engine oil temperature
until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐ ▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at
eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐ the low temperature end.
sages are displayed consecutively. Drive at moderate engine
These messages can be hidden for approx. and vehicle speeds.
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐ ▷ Normal operating tempera‐
played again automatically. ture: the pointer is in the
▷ Other Check Control messages are hidden middle or in the left half of
automatically after approx. 20 seconds. the temperature display.
They are stored and can be displayed ▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of
again later. the temperature range. A Check Control
message is also displayed.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
80
Displays Controls
Coolant temperature Time

If the coolant along with the engine becomes The time is displayed at the bot‐
too hot, a Check Control message is displayed. tom of the instrument cluster.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 198. Setting the time and time for‐
mat, refer to page 89.
Odometer and trip odometer

▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
Date
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2. The date is displayed in the
computer.
Setting the date and date for‐
mat, refer to page 90.
Show/reset kilometers
Press the knob. Range
▷ When the ignition is After the reserve range is
switched off, the time, the reached:
external temperature and
▷ A Check Control message is
the odometer are displayed.
displayed briefly.
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
▷ The remaining range is
odometer is reset.
shown on the onboard com‐
puter.
▷ When a dynamic driving style is used, such
External temperature as when cornering quickly, operation of the
engine is not always ensured.
External temperature warning
The Check Control message appears continu‐
If the indicator drops to
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
+37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal
sounds. Refuel promptly
A Check Control message is Refuel no later than at a range of
displayed. 30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is
There is an increased risk of ice on roads. not ensured and damage may occur.◀
Ice on roads Displaying the cruising range

Even at temperatures above 1. "Settings"
+37 ℉/+3 ℃, there can be a risk of ice on 2. "Info display"
roads.
3. "Additional indicators"
Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and
The range is displayed in the instrument clus‐
shaded roads, for example, to avoid the in‐
ter.
creased risk of an accident.◀
81
Controls Displays
Displays of the hybrid Electric driving: eDRIVE

system
Displays in the instrument cluster
The concept
The following functions of the hybrid system
are displayed:
▷ High-voltage battery charge indicator.
▷ Electric driving: eDRIVE.
When driving in COMFORT or ECO PRO
▷ Acceleration boost: eBOOST. modes, the power output of the electric motor
▷ Energy recovery: CHARGE. is indicated by arrows on the instrument clus‐
▷ Auto Start/Stop function: READY. ter.
The display depends on the system's operat‐ Depending on the position of the accelerator
ing condition. pedal, up to four arrows are displayed simulta‐
neously. The tachometer pointer stays on
Note READY.
If all four arrows are already displayed, the
High voltage
combustion engine is switched on, for exam‐
Even if no bars are displayed in the bat‐ ple, during accelerations or on uphill gradients.
tery symbol, the high-voltage system is still
under high voltage.◀
Acceleration boost: eBOOST
High-voltage battery charge indicator
When the electric motor is delivering maximum

output, eBOOST is displayed.
When drive readiness is switched on in COM‐
FORT mode, displays the available charge of
the high-voltage battery with bars in a battery
symbol. If five bars are shown, the high-voltage
battery is fully charged.
During normal vehicle operation, the high-volt‐
age battery is charged up to approx. 80 %.
This ensures optimum energy recovery when
braking or driving downhill.
82
Displays Controls
Energy recovery: CHARGE the percentage utilization of the functions of

the hybrid system, arrow 2.
One bar stands for one minute.
The combustion engine's average fuel con‐
sumption is indicated by a line above the bar
display and as a value to the right of the graph.
Displaying the energy flow

1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Hybrid"
The energy recovered is indicated in the in‐
3. "Energy flow"
strument cluster: in COMFORT mode by ar‐
rows and in ECO PRO mode by a bar below
the CHARGE display. The high-voltage battery
Energy flow of the hybrid system
is being charged.
Auto Start/Stop function: READY

READY indicates drive readi‐
ness.
The following are displayed:

Indications on the Control Display
▷ Active components of the hybrid system.
Displaying the hybrid system ▷ Direction of the energy flows:
utilization Orange: energy flow of the combustion en‐
1. "Vehicle Info" gine.
2. "Hybrid" Blue: energy flow of the hybrid system
3. "Hybrid usage" ▷ Driving states:
eDrive.
Hybrid system utilization
Drive.
eBOOST.
Charge.
▷ System requirements of the hybrid system,
for example, drive system not yet heated to
operating temperature.
▷ Driving requirement, e.g., transmission se‐
lector lever in the M/S position.
Gray bars indicate the fuel consumption of the

combustion engine, arrow 1. Blue bars indicate
83
Controls Displays
Adapting to the course of the road The current service requirements can be read
When the navigation system destination guid‐ out from the remote control by the service
ance is active, hybrid operation adapts to spe‐ specialist.
cific route sections.
Display
Use of the hybrid system is optional.
Data regarding the service status or legally
Symbols in the energy flow display indicate
mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐
that a situation has been detected ahead and
matically transmitted to your service center
hybrid operation is prepared for it.
before a service due date.
Symbols
Detailed information on service
requirements
Symbol Meaning
More information on the scope of service re‐
Downhill gradients: the system is quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
ready to charge the high-voltage play.
battery.
1. "Vehicle Info"
Target zone: eDRIVE electric driving 2. "Vehicle status"
is being prepared.
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
Current fuel consumption 4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.
Instrument cluster
Displays the current fuel con‐ Symbols
sumption. You can check
whether you are currently driv‐ Symbols Description
ing in an efficient and environ‐ No service is currently re‐
mentally-friendly manner. quired.
This display is available in the SPORT driving
mode. The deadline for service or a
Current consumption can be displayed in the legally mandated inspection is
onboard computer, refer to page 87, in any approaching.
driving mode.
The service deadline has al‐
ready passed.
Service requirements
Entering appointment dates
The concept Enter the dates for the required inspections.
The driving distance or the time to the next
scheduled maintenance is displayed briefly in
the instrument cluster after the ignition is
switched on.
84
Displays Controls
Ensure that the vehicle date and time are set Automatic transmission: displays
correctly.
Example Description
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status" Fuel efficient gear is engaged.
3. "Service required"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection" Shift into fuel efficient gear.
5. "Date:"
6. Adjust the settings.
7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored. Speed limit detection with
No Passing Information
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the service status or legally The concept
mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐
matically transmitted to your service center Speed limit detection
before a service due date.
Speed limit detection uses a symbol in the
You can check when your service center was shape of a traffic sign to display the currently
notified. detected speed limit. The camera at the base
of the interior rearview mirror detects traffic
1. "Vehicle Info"
signs at the edge of the road as well as variable
2. "Vehicle status" overhead sign posts. Traffic signs with extra
3. Open "Options". symbols for wet road conditions, etc. are also
4. "Last Service Request" detected and compared with vehicle interior
data, such as for the rain sensor, and are dis‐
played depending on the situation. The system
takes into account the information stored in
Gear shift indicator
the navigation system and also displays speed
limits present on routes without signs.
The concept
The system recommends the most fuel effi‐
cient gear for the current driving situation.
No Passing Information in the instrument clus‐
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped and ter displays the beginnings and ends of no
the country-specific version of the vehicle, the passing zones detected by the camera. The
gear shift indicator is active in the manual system accounts for only the beginnings and
mode of the automatic transmission and in the ends of No Passing zones marked by signs.
manual transmission.
No display is shown:
Indicators to shift up or down are displayed in
the instrument cluster. ▷ In countries where No Passing zones are
primarily identified with road markings.
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the
engaged gear is displayed. ▷ On routes without signage.
▷ Where there are railroad crossings, high‐
way markings or other situations where no
85
Controls Displays
signage is present, but passing would not Speed limit detection

be permitted.
Current speed limit.
Hints
Personal judgment
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic Speed limit detection is not
situation. available.
The system assists the driver and does not re‐
place the human eye.◀
At a glance Speed limit detection can also be displayed in

the Head-up Display.
Camera
▷ Start of No Passing zone.
▷ End of No Passing zone.
▷ No Passing Information not
available.
No Passing Information can also be displayed

in the Head-up Display.
The camera is located near the base of the System limits

mirror. The system may not be fully functional and
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ may provide incorrect information in the fol‐
terior rear view mirror clean and clear. lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
Switching on/off ▷ When signs are concealed by objects.
1. "Settings" ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
2. "Info display"
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
3. "Speed limit information"
▷ When the windshield behind the interior
If speed limit detection is switched on, it can
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
be displayed on the info display in the instru‐
ered by a sticker, etc.
ment cluster via the onboard computer. No
Passing Information is displayed together with ▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
the activated speed limit information. camera.
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
Display system are incorrect.
The following is displayed in the instrument ▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
cluster. tem.
86
Displays Controls
▷ When roads differ from the navigation, Activating a list and creating the
such as due to changes in the road net‐ setting
work.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a
speed sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.
Selection lists in the

instrument cluster On the right side of the steering wheel, turn
the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding
list.
The concept
The following can be displayed or operated us‐ Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐
ing the buttons and the thumbwheel on the ting and confirm it by pressing the thumb‐
steering wheel and the display in the instru‐ wheel.
ment cluster:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Activation of the voice activation system. Computer
In addition, programs of the Driving Dynamics
Indication in the info display
Control are displayed.
The information from the on‐
Display board computer is shown in the
info display in the instrument
Instrument cluster with enhanced cluster.
features
Calling up information on the info

display
Press the onboard computer button on the

turn signal lever.
Information is displayed on the info display of
the instrument cluster.
87
Controls Displays
Information at a glance If there is only enough fuel left for less than
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn 45 miles/80 km, the color of the display
signal lever calls up the following information changes.
on the info display:
Average fuel consumption
▷ Range.
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
▷ Average fuel consumption.
the period during which the engine is running.
▷ Current fuel consumption.
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
▷ Average speed. the distance traveled since the last reset by the
▷ Date. onboard computer.
▷ Speed limit detection.
Average speed
▷ Time of arrival.
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
When destination guidance is activated in engine manually stopped do not enter into the
the navigation system. calculation of the average speed.
▷ Distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in Resetting average values
the navigation system. Press and hold the computer button on the
▷ Arrow view of navigation system. turn signal lever.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
Distance to destination
The distance remaining to the destination is
When the arrow view in the Head-up Dis‐
displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐
play is inactive.
gation system before the trip is started.
▷ ECO PRO bonus range.
The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
▷ Charge state of the high-voltage battery as tomatically.
a percentage.
Time of arrival
Adjusting the info display
The estimated time of arrival is
You can select what information from the on‐
displayed if a destination is en‐
board computer is to be displayed on the info
tered in the navigation system
display of the instrument cluster.
before the trip is started.
1. "Settings" The time must be correctly set.
2. "Info display"
3. Select the desired displays. Speed limit detection
Description of the speed limit detection, refer
Information in detail to page 85, function.
Range Speed limit

Displays the estimated cruising range available Display of a speed limit which, when reached,
with the remaining fuel. should cause a warning to be issued.
It is calculated based on your driving style over
the last 20 miles/30 km.
88
Displays Controls
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed "Automatically reset": all values are reset
drops below the set speed limit once by at approx. 4 hours after the vehicle comes to
least 3 mph/5 km/h. a standstill.
Displaying, setting or changing the Display on the Control Display

limit Display the onboard computer or trip computer
1. "Settings" on the Control Display.
2. "Speed" 1. "Vehicle Info"
3. "Warning at:" 2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is
displayed. Resetting the fuel consumption or
5. Press the controller. speed
The speed limit is stored. 1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info"
Activating/deactivating the limit 3. "Consumpt." or "Speed"
1. "Settings" 4. "Yes"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
4. Press the controller. Sport displays
In the Control Display, the current system val‐
Setting your current speed as the limit ues of hybrid operation for power and torque
1. "Settings" can be displayed.
2. "Speed"
Displaying sport displays in the
3. "Select current speed" Control Display
4. Press the controller. 1. "Vehicle Info"
The current vehicle speed is stored as the 2. "Sport displays"
limit.
Trip computer
Settings on the Control
The vehicle features two types of computer.
Display
▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as
often as necessary. Time
▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an
overview of the current trip. Setting the time zone
1. "Settings"
Resetting the trip computer 2. "Time/Date"
1. "Vehicle Info"
3. "Time zone"
2. "Trip computer"
4. Select the desired time zone.
3. "Reset": all values are reset.
The time zone is stored.
89
Controls Displays
Setting the time Language

1. "Settings"
Setting the language
2. "Time/Date"
To set the language on the Control Display:
3. "Time:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours 1. "Settings"
are displayed. 2. "Language/Units"
5. Press the controller. 3. "Language:"
6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐ 4. Select the desired language.
nutes are displayed. The setting is stored for the remote control
7. Press the controller. currently in use.
The time is stored.
Setting the voice dialog
Setting the time format Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
1. "Settings" refer to page 27.
2. "Time/Date"
Units of measure
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format. Setting the units of measure
The time format is stored. To set the units for fuel consumption, route/
distance and temperature:
Date 1. "Settings"
Setting the date 2. "Language/Units"
1. "Settings" 3. Select the desired menu item.
2. "Time/Date" 4. Select the desired unit.
3. "Date:" The setting is stored for the remote control

currently in use.
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed.
Brightness
6. Make the necessary settings for the month Setting the brightness
and year. To set the brightness of the Control Display:
The date is stored.
1. "Settings"
Setting the date format 2. "Control display"
1. "Settings" 3. "Brightness"
2. "Time/Date" 4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐

ness is set.
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The date format is stored.
currently in use.
90
Displays Controls
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ If the image is distorted, check the basic set‐
ness control may not be clearly visible. tings.
Assist system information Switching on/off

1. "Settings"
Display on the Control Display
2. "Head-Up Display"
Information on the Assist system can be dis‐
played by activating Assist on the Control Dis‐
play.
Display
1. "Settings"
2. "Control display" Overview
3. "Driver assistance info" ▷ Speed.
▷ Navigation system.
▷ Check Control messages.
Head-up Display ▷ Collision warning.
The concept ▷ Speed limit detection.

▷ Cruise control.
▷ Pedestrian warning.
▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster.
Some of this information is only displayed
briefly as needed.
Selecting displays in the Head-up

Display
1. "Settings"
This system projects important information
into the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed.
3. "Displayed information"
The driver can get information without averting
his or her eyes from the road. 4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up
Display.
The settings are stored for the remote control
Display visibility
currently in use.
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
Display is influenced by the following factors: Setting the brightness
▷ Certain sitting positions. The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐ ambient light.
play. The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
1. "Settings"
▷ Wet roads.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller.
91
Controls Displays
When the low beams are switched on, the

brightness of the Head-up Display can be ad‐
ditionally influenced using the instrument light‐
ing.
currently in use.

1. "Settings"
3. "Height"
currently in use.
Setting the rotation

1. "Settings"
3. "Rotation"
currently in use.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible
to display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double im‐
ages from being displayed.
Therefore, have the special windshield re‐
placed by a service center only.
92
Lamps Controls
Lamps
Vehicle equipment If the driver door is opened with the ignition
switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐
All standard, country-specific and optional cally switched off at these switch settings.
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ Parking lamps
Switch position : the vehicle lamps light
up on all sides, e.g., for parking.
for safety-related functions and systems. Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, the vehicle battery may be‐
come discharged and it would then be impos‐
sible to start the engine.
At a glance
When parking, it is preferable to switch on the
one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to
page 94.
Low beams
Switch position with the ignition switched
on: the low beams light up.
Welcome lamps
1 Rear fog lamps When the vehicle is parked, leave the switch in
position or : parking and interior lamps
2 Front fog lamps come on briefly when the vehicle is unlocked
3 Automatic headlamp control, Adaptive depending on the ambient light.
Light Control, High-beam Assistant, Wel‐
come lamps, Daytime running lights Activating/deactivating
4 Lamps off, daytime running lights 1. "Settings"
5 Parking lamps, daytime running lights 2. "Lighting"
6 Low beams, welcome lamps, High-beam 3. "Welcome lights"
Assistant The setting is stored for the remote control
7 Instrument lighting currently in use.
Headlamp courtesy delay feature

Parking lamps/low beams, The low beams stay lit for a short while if the
headlamp flasher is switched on after the igni‐
headlamp control tion is switched off.
General information
Setting the duration
Switch position: 0, ,
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
93
Controls Lamps
3. "Pathway lighting:" Roadside parking lamps

4. Set the duration.
currently in use.
Automatic headlamp control

Switch position : the low beams are
switched on and off automatically, e.g., in tun‐
nels, in twilight or if there is precipitation. The
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights
up. The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on. Switching on
The low beams always stay on when the fog With the ignition switched off, press the lever
lamps are switched on. either up or down past the resistance point for
approx. 2 seconds.
Personal responsibility
The automatic headlamp control cannot Switching off
serve as a substitute for your personal judg‐ Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in
ment in determining when the lamps should be the opposite direction.
switched on in response to ambient lighting
conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect Adaptive Light Control
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you
should always switch on the lamps manually The concept
under these conditions.◀
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
Daytime running lights tion of the road surface.
With the ignition switched on, the daytime run‐ Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
ning lights light up in position 0, or . rameters, the light from the headlamp follows
After the ignition is switched off, the parking the course of the road.
lamps light up in position .
In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or
when turning, one of the two front fog lamps is
Activating/deactivating switched on as a corneringlamp. As a result
In some countries, daytime running lights are the inside of the curve is better lighted.
compulsory, so it may not be possible to deac‐
tivate the daytime running lights. Activating
1. "Settings" Switch position with the ignition switched
on.
2. "Lighting"
The cornering lamps are automatically
3. "Daytime running lamps"
switched on depending on the steering angle
The setting is stored for the remote control or the use of turn signals.
currently in use.
94
Lamps Controls
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐ The indicator lamp in the instrument
tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐ cluster lights up.
er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
When the low beams are on, the lights are au‐
When driving in reverse, only the cornering
tomatically brightened or dimmed.
lamp is active.
The system responds to light from oncoming
Malfunction traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or has The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐
failed. Have the system checked as soon as ment cluster lights up when the system
possible. switches on the high beams. Depend‐
ing on the version of the system in the vehicle,
the high beams may not switch off for oncom‐
ing vehicles, but may only be dimmed in the
High-beam Assistant
areas that blind oncoming traffic. In this case,
the blue indicator light will stay on.
The concept
When the low beams are switched on, this sys‐
tem automatically switches the high beams on Switching the high beams on and off
and off or suppresses the light in the areas that manually
blind oncoming traffic. The procedure is con‐
trolled by a sensor on the front of the interior
rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the
high beams are switched on whenever the traf‐
fic situation allows. The driver can intervene at
any time and switch the high beams on and off
as usual.
Activating
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
▷ High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
The High-beam Assistant can be switched off

when manually adjusting the light. To reacti‐
vate the High-beam Assistant, press the but‐
ton on the turn signal lever.
System limits
The High-beam Assistant can be activated Personal responsibility
when the low beams are switched on.
The high-beam assistant cannot serve as
1. Turn the light switch to or . a substitute for the driver's personal judgment
2. Press the button on the turn signal lever, of when to use the high beams. Therefore,
arrow. manually switch off the high beams in situa‐
tions where this is required to avoid a safety
risk.◀
95
Controls Lamps
The system is not fully functional in situations If the automatic headlamp control, refer to
such as the following, and driver intervention page 94, is activated, the low beams will come
may be necessary: on automatically when you switch on the front
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, fog lamps.
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and Instrument lighting
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; and at animal crossings. Adjusting
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐ The parking lamps or low beams
sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐ must be switched on to adjust
coming traffic on freeways. the brightness.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the Adjust the brightness using the
presence of highly reflective signs. thumbwheel.
▷ At low speeds.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ Interior lamps
ered with stickers, etc.
General information
Camera The interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lamps
and courtesy lamps are controlled automati‐
cally.
The brightness of some of these lamps is influ‐
enced by the thumbwheel for the instrument
lighting.
The camera is located near the base of the

mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rear view mirror clean and clear.
1 Interior lamps
Fog lamps 2 Reading lamp
Front fog lamps Switching the interior lamps on and

The low beams must be switched on. off
Press the button. The green indicator Press the button.
lamp lights up.
96
Lamps Controls
To switch off permanently: press the button for

approx. 3 seconds.
Switch back on: press button.
Reading lamps
Press the button.
Reading lamps are located at the front and rear

next to the interior lamps.
When the interior lamps are switched off per‐
manently, the reading lamps cannot be
switched on.
Ambient light
Depending on the equipment, the lighting can
be adjusted in the interior for some lights.
Selecting color scheme

1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Ambient:"
4. Select the desired setting.
If the color scheme of the line is selected and
the welcome lamps are activated, the welcome
lamps are displayed in the color of the line
when the vehicle is unlocked.
Setting the brightness

The brightness of the ambient light can be ad‐
justed via the thumbwheel for the instrument
lighting or on the Control Display.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Brightness:"
4. Adjust the brightness.
97
Controls Safety
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag

2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbags
3 Head airbag
Front airbags Head airbags

Front airbags help protect the driver and front In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in the head.
which safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐
quate restraint. Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
Side airbags impact.
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
98
Safety Controls
Protective action ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐

Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end This also applies to steering wheel covers,
collisions. the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars
and the sides of the headliner.◀
Information on how to ensure the optimal
Even when all instructions are followed closely,
protective effect of the airbags
injury from contact with the airbags cannot be
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags. ruled out in certain situations.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
steering wheel rim, holding your hands at short-term and, in most cases, temporary
the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to hearing impairment in sensitive individuals.
keep the danger of injury to your hands or
arms as low as possible if the airbag is trig‐ In the case of a malfunction, deactivation
gered. and after triggering of the airbags
▷ There should be no people, animals, or ob‐ Do not touch the individual components imme‐
jects between an airbag and a person. diately after the system has been triggered;
otherwise, there is the danger of burns.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area. Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐
mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by
▷ Keep the dashboard and window on the
the service center or a workshop that has the
front passenger side clear, i.e., do not
necessary authorization for handling explo‐
cover with adhesive labels or coverings,
sives.
and do not attach holders such as for navi‐
gation instruments and mobile phones. Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐
tem could lead to failure in an emergency or
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐
undesired triggering of the airbag, either of
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and
which could result in injury.◀
legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries
can occur if the front airbag is triggered. Warnings and information on the airbags are
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or also found on the sun visors.
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not approved specifically for seats Functional readiness of the airbag
with integrated side airbags. system
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as When the ignition is switched on, the
jackets, over the backrests. warning lamp in the instrument cluster
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads lights up briefly and thereby indicates
away from the side airbag and do not rest the operational readiness of the entire airbag
against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries system and the belt tensioner.
can occur if the airbags are triggered.
▷ Do not remove the airbag restraint system. Airbag system malfunctioning
▷ Do not remove the steering wheel. ▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the
ignition is turned on.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, cover them or modify ▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously.
them in any way.
99
Controls Safety
When there is a malfunction, have the ▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
airbag system checked immediately or other items to the front passenger seat
When there is a malfunction, have the airbag unless they are specifically recommended
system checked immediately; otherwise, there by the manufacturer of your vehicle.
is a risk that the system does not function as ▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
expected in the event of an accident despite passenger seat if a child restraint system is
corresponding severity of the accident.◀ to be installed on it.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
Automatic deactivation of the front could press against the seat from below.
passenger airbags ▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
The system determines whether the front pas‐
senger seat is occupied by measuring the re‐ Indicator lamp for the front passenger
sistance of the human body. airbags
The front, knee, and side airbag on the front
passenger side are activated or deactivated
accordingly.
Leave feet in the footwell
Make sure that the front passenger
keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise,
the front passenger airbags may not function
properly.◀
Child restraint fixing system in the front The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐
passenger seat bags indicates the operating state of the front
Before transporting a child on the front pas‐ passenger airbags.
senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐ The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac‐
structions under Children on the front passen‐ tivated or deactivated.
ger seat.◀
▷ The indicator lamp lights up
when a child who is properly
Malfunction of the automatic
seated in a child restraint fix‐
deactivation system
ing system intended for that
When transporting older children and adults, purpose is detected on the
the front passenger airbags may be deacti‐ seat or the seat is empty.
vated in certain sitting positions. In this case, The airbags on the front
the indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐ passenger side are not acti‐
bags lights up. vated.
In this case, change the sitting position so that ▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
the front passenger airbags are activated and for example, a correctly seated person of
the indicator lamp goes out. sufficient size is detected on the seat. The
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐
the person sit in the rear. tivated.
To make sure that the occupied seat cushion
can be evaluated correctly
100
Safety Controls
Detected child seats Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

The system generally detects children seated
in a child seat, especially in the child seats that The concept
were required by NHTSA when the vehicle was The system monitors tire pressure in the four
manufactured. After installing a child seat, mounted tires. The system warns you if there
make sure that the indicator lamp for the front is a significant loss of pressure in one or more
passenger airbags lights up. This indicates tires. For this purpose, sensors in the tire
that the child seat has been detected and the valves measure the tire inflation pressure.
front passenger airbags are not activated.
Hints
Strength of the driver's and front
passenger airbag Tire damage due to external factors
The strength with which the driver's and front Sudden tire damage caused by external
passenger airbags are triggered depends on influences cannot be indicated in advance.◀
the position of the driver's and front passenger Pay attention to the other information and indi‐
seats. cations under Tire inflation pressure, refer to
To maintain the accuracy of this function over page 186, as well when using the system.
the long-term, calibrate the front seats when a
corresponding message appears on the Con‐ Functional requirements
trol Display. The system must have been reset with the
correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐
Calibrating the front seats ble signaling of tire pressure loss is not en‐
A corresponding message appears on the sured.
Control Display. Reset the system again after each correction
1. Move the respective seat forward all the of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire
way. or wheel change.
2. Move the respective seat forward again. It Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
moves forward briefly. ensure that the system will operate properly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.

Status display
The calibration procedure is completed when
The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐
the message on the Control Display disap‐
tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
pears.
play, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.
If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
peat the calibration. 1. "Vehicle Info"
If the message does not disappear after a re‐ 2. "Vehicle status"

peat calibration, have the system checked as 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)"
soon as possible. The status is displayed.
Unobstructed area of movement
Status display
Ensure that the area of movement of the
seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury The tire and system status is indicated by the
or damage to objects.◀ color of the wheels and a text message on the
Control Display.
101
Controls Safety
All wheels green The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you
System is active and will issue a warning rela‐ drive away again, the reset resumes automati‐
tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during cally.
the last reset.
Low tire pressure message
One wheel is yellow The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in Check Control message is displayed.
the indicated tire. ▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
All wheels are yellow ▷ No reset was performed for the system.
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in The system therefore issues a warning
several tires. based on the tire inflation pressures before
the last reset.
Wheels, gray
The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
for this may be: Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
▷ The system is being reset.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
▷ Malfunction. regular tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 192, are la‐
Carry out reset
beled with a circular symbol containing the
Reset the system after each correction of the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change. Do not continue driving without run-flat
tires
1. "Vehicle Info"
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
2. "Vehicle status" equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
3. "Perform reset" may result in serious accidents.◀
4. Start the engine - do not drive away. When a low inflation pressure is indicated,
5. Carry out the reset with "Perform reset". DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
6. Drive away. if necessary.
The tires are shown in gray and the status is

Actions in the event of a flat tire
displayed.
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a Normal tires
short period, the tire inflation pressures set are
1. Identify the damaged tire.
accepted as reference values. The reset is
completed automatically during driving. Do this by checking the air pressure in all
four tires.
After a successfully completed Reset, the
wheels on the Control Display are shown in If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
green and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) is correct, it is possible that a reset was not
active" is displayed. carried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Then perform the reset.
102
Safety Controls
If an identification is not possible, please trip, the actual distance may be smaller or
contact the service center. greater depending on the driving speed, road
2. Rectify the flat tire. conditions, external temperature, cargo load,
etc.
Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility Sys‐
tem, may damage the TPM wheel elec‐ Continued driving with a flat tire
tronics. In this case, have the electronics Drive moderately and do not exceed a
checked at the next opportunity and have speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
them replaced if necessary.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
Run-flat tires duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering
Maximum speed
properties.◀
You can continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving
Continued driving with a flat tire can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire
could come loose and cause an accident. Do
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ not continue driving, and contact your service
vers. center.◀
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at Required inflation pressure check
the next opportunity. message
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires A Check Control message is displayed.
is correct, it is possible that a reset was not Check the tire inflation pressure and carry out
carried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor. In a reset of the system.
that case, carry out a reset.
In some cases, a wheel was changed without
Possible driving distance with complete loss of having carried out a reset.
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire System limits
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load The system does not function properly if a re‐
and the driving style and conditions. set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is
For a vehicle containing an average load, the reported even though the tire inflation pres‐
possible driving distance is approx. sures are correct.
50 miles/80 km. The tire pressure depends on the temperature
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, of the tire. If the tire temperature rises, e.g.,
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐ due to driving or because of the heat of the
duced lane stability during braking, a longer Sun, the tire inflation pressure increases also.
braking distance, and altered self-steering The tire pressure is reduced when the tire
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐ temperature falls again. This behavior may
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐ cause a warning to be issued if temperatures
ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc. fall very sharply.
Because the possible driving distance de‐
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
103
Controls Safety
Malfunction proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's

responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
The yellow warning lamp flashes and
even if under-inflation has not reached the
then lights up continuously. A Check
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
Control message is displayed. No flat
tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also
tire or loss of tire pressure can be detected.
been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐
Display in the following situations: cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐
ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:
tor is combined with the low tire pressure
have the service center check it if neces‐
telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐
sary.
tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by minute and then remain continuously illumi‐
your service center. nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
Reset the system again. function exists. When the malfunction indicator
▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with is illuminated, the system may not be able to
the same radio frequency: after leaving the detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
area of the disturbance, the system auto‐ TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
matically becomes active again. reasons, including the installation of replace‐
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
Declaration according to NHTSA/ that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐
System tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
to continue to function properly.
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size FTM Flat Tire Monitor
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the The concept
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) The system detects a pressure loss on the ba‐
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has sis of speed differences between the individual
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring wheels while driving.
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐ In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is and therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when sponding wheel change. This is detected and
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you reported as a flat tire.
should stop and check your tires as soon as
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
tion pressure in the tires.
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
Functional requirements
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐
ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the The system must have been initialized when
vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for wise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not en‐
104
Safety Controls
sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐ 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after regular tires or run-flat tires.
every tire or wheel change. Run-flat tires, refer to page 192, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
Status display letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
Do not continue driving without run-flat
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.,
tires
whether or not the FTM is active.
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
1. "Vehicle Info" equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
2. "Vehicle status" may result in serious accidents.◀
3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)" When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
The status is displayed. bility Control is switched on if necessary.
Initialization System limits

The initialization process adopts the set infla‐ Sudden tire damage
tion tire pressures as reference values for the Sudden serious tire damage caused by
detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐
confirming the inflation pressures. vance.◀
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains. A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires
cannot be detected. Therefore, check the tire
1. "Vehicle Info" inflation pressure regularly.
2. "Vehicle status" The system could be delayed or malfunction in
3. "Perform reset" the following situations:
4. Start the engine - do not drive away. ▷ When the system has not been initialized.
5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset". ▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
6. Drive away.
▷ Sporty driving style: slip in the drive
The initialization is completed while driving,
wheels, high lateral acceleration.
which can be interrupted at any time.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Indication of a flat tire
Normal tires
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A 1. Identify the damaged tire.
Check Control message is displayed.
Do this by checking the air pressure in all
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire four tires.
inflation pressure.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ have been initialized. In this case, initialize
vers. the system.
105
Controls Safety
If an identification is not possible, please Continued driving with a flat tire

contact the service center. Drive moderately and do not exceed a
2. Rectify the flat tire. speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
Run-flat tires change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
Maximum speed braking distance and altered self-steering
You can continue driving with a damaged tire properties.◀
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Final tire failure
Continued driving with a flat tire Vibrations or loud noises while driving
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce
speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ could come loose and cause an accident. Do
vers. not continue driving, and contact your service
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. center.◀
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires Intelligent Safety
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize The concept
the system. Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐
Possible driving distance with complete loss of telligent Safety consists of one or more of the
tire inflation pressure: following systems, which can help to avoid an
imminent collision. These systems are active
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
automatically every time the engine is started
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
using the Start/Stop button:
and the driving style and conditions.
▷ Collision warning, refer to page 107.
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
possible driving distance is approx. ▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 112.
50 miles/80 km.
Note
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐ Personal responsibility
duced lane stability during braking, a longer The system does not serve as a substi‐
braking distance, and altered self-steering tute for the driver's personal judgment of the
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐ traffic situation.
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐
ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.
cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise an
Because the possible driving distance de‐ accident is still possible despite all warnings.◀
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
trip, the actual distance may be smaller or
greater depending on the driving speed, road
conditions, external temperature, cargo load,
etc.
106
Safety Controls
At a glance Collision warning

Button in the vehicle Depending on how the equipment is equipped,
the collision warning system consists of one of
the two systems:
▷ Collision warning with City Braking func‐
tion, refer to page 107;
▷ Collision warning with braking function, re‐
fer to page 110
Collision warning with City

Intelligent Safety button Braking function
The concept
Camera The system can help to prevent accidents. If
an accident cannot be prevented, the system
helps to reduce the collision speed.
The system issues a warning if there is immi‐
nent danger of a collision and if so brakes inde‐
pendently.
The automatic braking intervention is done
with limited force and duration.
The system is controlled via a camera in the
base of the mirror.
The camera is located near the base of the The collision warning is available even if cruise
mirror. control has been deactivated.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ When the vehicle is intentionally brought close
terior rear view mirror clean and clear. to a vehicle, the collision warning is delayed to
avoid false warnings.
Switching on/off
The Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
General information
cally active after each engine start via the start/ The system issues a two-phase warning of a
stop button. danger of collision with vehicles at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The time of these
Press the button: the systems are warnings may vary depending on the current
switched off. The LED goes out. driving situation.
Press the button: the systems are switched off. Up to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h a braking inter‐
The LED lights up. vention occurs when appropriate.
Settings can be made on the Control Display.
107
Controls Safety
Detection range Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active every time
the engine is started using the Start/Stop but‐
ton.
Vehicles are observed when they are traveling Switching off

in the same direction of movement if they are The system is only switched off until the next
located within the detection range of the sys‐ time the engine is started with the Start/Stop
tem. button.
Press the button.
At a glance The LED goes out.
Button in the vehicle Switch the system back on: press the button
again.
Setting the warning time

The warning time can be set via iDrive.
1. "Settings"
2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"
3. Activate the desired warning time on the
Control Display.
Intelligent Safety button The selected channel is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Camera Warning with braking function
Note
Adapting your speed and driving style
The warning does not relieve the driver
of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving
speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀
Display
If a collision with a vehicle detected in this way
The camera is located near the base of the is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
mirror. instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
108
Safety Controls
Symbol Measure ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐

ger of an accident occurring.◀
The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐
ing.
Detection range
Increase braking and distance.
The system's detection capabilities are limited.
The vehicle flashes red and an This may result in the warning not being is‐
acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐ sued or being issued late.
ing. For example, the following situations may not
You are requested to intervene by be detected:
braking or making an evasive ma‐ ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
neuver. them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
Braking intervention you or sharply decelerating vehicles.
The warning prompts the driver himself to in‐ ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
tervene. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
ing force is used. A prerequisite for the brake
booster is a sufficiently fast and sufficiently ▷ Pedestrians.
strong actuation of the brake pedal. In addition,
if there is a risk of collision, the system can as‐ Functional limitations
sist with a slight braking intervention. The in‐ The system may not be fully functional in the
tervention can bring a vehicle traveling at slow following situations:
speed to a complete stop. ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
The braking intervention is executed only if fall.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on ▷ In tight curves.
and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
vated.
limited or deactivated, for example, DSC
The braking intervention can be interrupted by OFF.
pressing on the accelerator pedal or by actively
▷ If the camera in the mirror or the radar sen‐
moving the steering wheel.
sor is dirty or obscured.
Tow-starting and towing
When tow-starting and towing the vehi‐ ately after vehicle shipment.
cle, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems;
▷ If there is constant dimming because of
otherwise, improper behavior of the braking
oncoming light, for example, from the sun
function of individual systems could result in
low in the sky.
an accident.◀
Prewarning sensitivity
System limits Depending on the set prewarning time, this
Be alert may result in increased false warnings.
Due to system limitations, warnings may
be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and
109
Controls Safety
Collision warning with At a glance

braking function Button in the vehicle
The concept
The system issues a warning if there is immi‐
nent danger of a collision and also includes a
braking function.
If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise
Control with Stop & Go, the collision warning is
controlled via the cruise control radar sensor in
conjunction with a camera.
The collision warning is available even if cruise
control has been deactivated. Intelligent Safety button
When the vehicle is intentionally brought close
to a vehicle, the collision warning is delayed to
Camera
avoid false warnings.
General information
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
possible danger of collision with vehicles at
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The time
of these warnings may vary depending on the
current driving situation.
Detection range
mirror.
Switching on/off
The system is automatically active every time
It responds to stationary or moving objects the engine is started using the Start/Stop but‐
that are within the detection range of the radar ton.
system.
Switching off
The system is only switched off until the next
time the engine is started with the Start/Stop
button.
Press the button.
The LED goes out.
110
Safety Controls
Switch the system back on: press the button Adapting your speed and driving style
again. The warning does not relieve the driver
Setting the warning time speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀
The warning time can be set via iDrive. The braking intervention can be interrupted by
pressing on the accelerator pedal or by actively
1. "Settings"
moving the steering wheel.
2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"
3. Activate the desired warning time on the
Control Display. When tow-starting and towing the vehi‐
cle, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems;
The selected channel is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
an accident.◀
Display
Warning stages Display in the instrument cluster

The collision warning can be issued in the in‐
Prewarning strument cluster, in the Head-up Display, and
This warning is issued, for example, when acoustically.
there is the impending danger of a collision or
the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small. Warning stages
Acute warning with braking function Symbol Measure

Warning of the imminent danger of a collision The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐
when the vehicle approaches another object at ing.
a relatively high differential speed. Increase distance.
The acute warning prompts the driver to inter‐
vene and, if there is the danger of a collision, is The vehicle flashes red and an
accompanied by a braking intervention. acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐
ing.
The braking intervention is executed with lim‐
ited braking force and for a brief period only. You are requested to intervene by
braking or making an evasive ma‐
The intervention can bring the vehicle to a
neuver.
complete stop.
The braking intervention is executed only if
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐ The display does not relieve the driver of
vated. the responsibility to adapt his or her driving
Above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h, the braking
intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure.
No automatic delay occurs.
111
Controls Safety
System limits Prewarning sensitivity

Be alert Depending on the set prewarning time, this
may result in increased false warnings.
ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐ Pedestrian warning with city
ger of an accident occurring.◀ braking function
Detection range The concept

The system's detection capabilities are limited. The system can help to prevent accidents with
pedestrians.
This may result in the warning not being is‐
sued or being issued late. The system issues a warning in the city driving
speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐
For example, the following situations may not lision with pedestrians and includes a braking
be detected: function.
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach The system is controlled via the camera in the
them at high speed. base of the interior mirror.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you or sharply decelerating vehicles. General information
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. The system issues a warning with brightness
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. staring at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx.
35 mph/60 km/h regarding a possible risk of
▷ Pedestrians.
collision with pedestrians and assists with a
brake intervention shortly before a collision.
Functional limitations
It responds to persons that are within the de‐
The system may not be fully functional in the
tection range of the system.
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ Detection range
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, for example, DSC
OFF.
▷ If the camera in the mirror or the radar sen‐
sor is dirty or obscured.
▷ If there is constant dimming because of The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
oncoming light, for example, from the sun ided into two areas.
low in the sky. ▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left.
112
Safety Controls
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐ Switching off

cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
Press the button: the systems are
sued about pedestrians who are located within
switched off. The LED goes out.
the extended area only if they are moving in
the direction of the central area. Press the button: the systems are switched off.
The LED lights up.
At a glance
Warning with braking function
Button in the vehicle
Note
The warning does not relieve the driver
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
Intelligent Safety button instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐
nal sounds.
Camera
Intervene immediately by braking or
making an evasive maneuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself to in‐
tervene. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. A prerequisite for the brake
booster is a sufficiently fast and sufficiently
strong actuation of the brake pedal. In addition,
The camera is located near the base of the if there is a risk of collision, the system can as‐
mirror. sist with a slight braking intervention. The in‐
tervention can bring a vehicle traveling at slow
speed to a complete stop.
The braking intervention is executed only if
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
Switching on/off and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐
vated.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
The system is automatically active every time pressing on the accelerator pedal or by actively
the engine is started using the Start/Stop but‐ moving the steering wheel.
ton.
113
Controls Safety
Tow-starting and towing ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐

When tow-starting and towing the vehi‐ ately after vehicle shipment.
cle, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems; ▷ When it is dark outside.
an accident.◀ Lane departure warning
System limits The concept
Be alert Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts
you when the vehicle on streets with lane
markings is about to leave the lane. This
speed, depending on the country version, is
between 35 mph/55 km/h and
ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐
45 mph/70 km/h.
ger of an accident occurring.◀
When switching on the system below this
speed, a message is displayed in the instru‐
Detection range ment cluster.
The detection capability of the camera is lim‐
The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in
ited.
the event of warnings. The time of the warning
This may result in the warning not being is‐ may vary depending on the current driving sit‐
sued or being issued late. uation.
For example, the following situations may not The system does not provide a warning if the
be detected: turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such Notes
because of the viewing angle or contour. Personal responsibility
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range. The system cannot serve as a substitute
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than for the driver's personal judgment of the
32 in/80 cm. course of the road and the traffic situation.
In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steer‐
Functional limitations ing wheel, as you may lose control of the vehi‐
The system may not be fully functional or may cle.◀
not be available in the following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the camera view field or the front wind‐
shield are dirty or covered.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop knob.
114
Safety Controls
At a glance ▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking was de‐

tected and warnings can be issued.
Issued warning
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐
brating.
If the turn signal is set before changing the
lane, a warning is not issued.
End of warning
The warning ends:
Lane departure warning
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
Camera ▷ When braking hard.
▷ When using the turn signal.
System limits
▷ In the event of worn, poorly visible, merg‐
ing, diverging, or multiple lane markings
such as in construction areas.
mirror. ▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
terior rear view mirror clean and clear. ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
objects.
Switching on/off
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
Press the button. front of you.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
▷ Off: the LED goes out. rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
The state is stored for the remote control cur‐ ered with stickers, etc.
rently in use. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
Display in the instrument cluster
▷ Lines: system is activated.
115
Controls Safety
Active Blind Spot Detection At a glance
The concept Button in the vehicle
Two radar sensors below the rear bumper Active Blind Spot Detection
monitor the area behind and next to the vehicle
at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
The system indicates whether there are vehi‐ Radar sensors
cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching
from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
The lamp in the exterior mirror housing lights
up dimly.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn

signal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐
uations described above.
The lamp in the housing of the exterior mirror
flashes and the steering wheel vibrates. The radar sensors are located under the rear
bumper.
Notes
Personal responsibility Switching on/off
The system does not serve as a substi‐ Press the button.
tute for the driver's personal judgment of the
traffic situation.
Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐
cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise an
accident is still possible despite all warnings.◀ The system can issue warnings at speeds
above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
The state is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
116
Safety Controls
Display ▷ NBG009014A.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
Information stage Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
The dimmed lamp in the mirror housing indi‐
cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot
or approaching from behind.
Warning Brake force display

If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the
The concept
critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly
and the lamp in the mirror housing flashes
brightly.
The warning stops when the turn signal is
switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the
critical zone.
System limits
▷ During normal brake application, the outer
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
brake lamps light up.
much faster than your own.
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
brake lamps light up in addition.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered
with stickers.
A Check Control message is displayed when
the system is not fully functional.
For US owners only

part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
117
Controls Driving stability control systems
Driving stability control systems

Vehicle equipment ject to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the
vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine
All standard, country-specific and optional speed and by applying brakes to the individual
equipment that is offered in the model series is wheels.
ment is also described that is not available in a Adjust your driving style to the situation
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional An appropriate driving style is always the
equipment or country variant. This also applies responsibility of the driver.
for safety-related functions and systems. The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even
with DSC.
Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety
Antilock Brake System ABS margin by driving in a risky manner.◀
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking. Indicator/warning lamps
The vehicle remains steerable even during full The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
brake applications, thus increasing active trols the drive forces and brake forces.
safety.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐ failed.
gine.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF

Brake assistant When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is
reduced during acceleration and when driving
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system in bends.
automatically produces the maximum braking
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
force boost. This then reduces braking dis‐
again as soon as possible.
tance to a minimum during full braking. This
system utilizes all of the benefits provided by
ABS. Deactivating DSC
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal Press and hold the button, but not lon‐
for the duration of the full braking. ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐
strument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed.
DSC Dynamic Stability The DSC system is switched off.
Control
Activating DSC
The concept
Press the button.
DSC prevents traction loss in the driving
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
wheels when driving away and accelerating.
lamp go out.
DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐
tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Sub‐
118
Driving stability control systems Controls
Indicator/warning lamps Deactivating DTC

When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐ Press the button again.
played in the instrument cluster.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is tor lamp go out.
deactivated.
Above 31 mph/50 km/h DTC is automatically
deactivated.
DTC Dynamic Traction

Control Dynamic Damping Control
The concept The concept
The DTC system is a version of the DSC in This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐
which forward momentum is optimized. tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐
The system ensures maximum forward mo‐ eling on uneven road surfaces.
mentum on special road conditions, e.g., unp‐ The system enhances driving dynamics and
lowed snowy roads, but driving stability is lim‐ comfort as required for the road surface and
ited. driving style.
It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐
ate caution. Programs
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC The system offers several different programs.
under the following special circumstances: The programs can be selected via the Driving
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, Dynamics Control, refer to page 120.
snow-covered roads.
SPORT
▷ When rocking the vehicle or driving off in
deep snow or on loose surfaces. Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐
sorbers for greater driving agility.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
SPORT+
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
Traction Control Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐
sorbers for greater driving agility when driving
Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC
with limited driving stabilization.
provides maximum traction on loose ground.
Driving stability is limited during acceleration
COMFORT/ECO PRO
and when driving in bends.
Balanced control of the vehicle.
Activating DTC
Press the button. Variable sport steering
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC The variable sport steering increases the
OFF lights up. steering angle of the front wheels at large
steering wheel angles, e.g., in tight curves or
when parking. Steering becomes more direct.
119
It also varies the force required to turn the TRACTION

wheels in accordance with the vehicle speed. When TRACTION is active, the vehicle has
This results in a sporty steering response. In maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC
addition, it becomes easier to steer during Dynamic Traction Control, refer to page 119, is
parking and maneuvering. activated. Driving stability is limited during ac‐
celeration and when driving in bends.
Driving Dynamics Control SPORT+

Sporty driving with optimized chassis and
The concept adapted engine control with limited driving sta‐
The Driving Dynamics Control can be used to bilization.
adjust the certain characteristics of the vehicle. Dynamic Traction Control is switched on.
Various programs can be selected for this pur‐
The driver handles several of the stabilization
pose. The Driving Dynamics Control and the
tasks.
DSC OFF buttons can each be used to activate
a program.
Activating SPORT+
Operating the programs Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT+ appears in the instrument
Press the button Program cluster and the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights
up.
DSC OFF
TRACTION
Automatic program change
SPORT+ When activating cruise control, the program
SPORT automatically switches to SPORT mode.
COMFORT
ECO PRO
SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.
The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up:
Automatic program change
Dynamic Traction Control is activated.
The system automatically switches to COM‐
FORT in the following situations:
▷ Failure of DSC Dynamic Damping Control. SPORT
Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
and engine control for greater driving agility
▷ When activating cruise control in TRAC‐ with maximum driving stabilization.
TION or DSC OFF mode.
The program can be configured to individual
specifications. The configuration is stored for
DSC OFF
the remote control currently in use.
When DSC OFF, refer to page 118, is active,
driving stability is limited during acceleration Activating SPORT
and when driving in bends.
Press button repeatedly until SPORT
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
120
Driving stability control systems Controls
Configuring SPORT Activating ECO PRO

When the display is activated on the Control Press button repeatedly until ECO
Display, refer to page 121, the SPORT driving PRO is displayed in the instrument
mode can be set to individual specifications. cluster.
▷ Activating SPORT.
▷ "Configure SPORT" Configuring ECO PRO
▷ Configuring the SPORT driving mode. 1. Activate ECO PRO.
SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐ 2. "Configure ECO PRO"
vated: Make the desired settings.
1. "Settings"
2. "Driving mode"
Displays
3. "Configure SPORT" Program selection
4. Configure driving mode.
Pressing the button displays a
This configuration is retrieved when the list of the selectable programs.
SPORT driving mode is activated.
COMFORT
For a balanced tuning with maximum driving
stabilization. Selected program
The selected program is dis‐
Activating COMFORT played in the instrument cluster.
Press button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
In certain situations, the system automatically Display on the Control Display

changes to the NORMAL program, automatic Program changes can be displayed on the
program change, refer to page 120. Control Display.
ECO PRO 1. "Settings"

ECO PRO, refer to page 175, provides consis‐ 2. "Driving mode"
tent tuning to minimize fuel consumption for 3. "Driving mode info"
maximum range with maximum driving stabili‐
zation.
Comfort functions and the engine controller Drive-off assistant
are adjusted.
This system supports driving away on gradi‐
The program can be configured to individual ents. The parking brake is not required.
specifications.
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive away
without delay.
121
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is

held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may
roll back slightly.
Driving off without delay
After releasing the foot brake, start driv‐
ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant
will not hold the vehicle in place for more than
approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin
rolling back.◀
122
Driving comfort Controls
Driving comfort
Vehicle equipment The speed is also maintained on downhill gra‐
dients, but may not be maintained on uphill
All standard, country-specific and optional slopes if engine power is insufficient.
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ General information
Depending on the set driving program, the
characteristics of the cruise control can
change in certain areas.
Hints
Active Cruise Control with Personal responsibility
Stop & Go function, ACC Even an active system does not release
the driver from personal responsibility for the
The concept driving process, especially for lane tracking,
adaptation of speed, distance and driving style
This system can be used to select a desired
to the traffic conditions.
speed that the vehicle will maintain automati‐
cally on clear roads. Because of technical system limits, the system
cannot independently react appropriately in all
To the extent possible, the system automati‐
traffic situations.
cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle
ahead of you. Monitor the driving process, the surrounding
area and what is occurring in traffic continu‐
The distance that the vehicle maintains to the
ously and attentively and actively intervene as
vehicle ahead of you can be varied.
required, e.g., by braking, steering or making
For safety reasons, it depends on the speed. an evasive maneuver.◀
To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐
tomatically reduces the speed, applies the Unfavorable weather conditions
brakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehi‐ In the event of unfavorable weather and
cle ahead begins moving faster. light conditions, e. g. if there is rain, snowfall,
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, the slush, fog or glare, this may result in poorer
system is able to detect this within the given recognition of vehicles and lane limits as well
system limits. If the vehicle ahead of your as short-term interruptions for vehicles that are
drives away again from a halt, your vehicle is already detected. Drive attentively, and react to
able to accelerate if operated accordingly. the current traffic events. Intervene actively
when necessary, e.g., by braking, steering or
Even if some time passes before the vehicle
making an evasive maneuver, otherwise, there
ahead of you drives away again, your own vehi‐
is danger of an accident.◀
cle can still be accelerated automatically and
simply.
As soon as the road is clear, it accelerates to
the desired speed.
123
Controls Driving comfort
At a glance
Buttons on the steering wheel
Press the Function

button
System on/off, interrupt, refer to

page 124
Maintaining/storing the speed, A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the de‐
refer to page 125 tection of vehicles.
Resume speed, refer to ▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐
page 126 move layers of snow and ice carefully.
Reduce distance, refer to ▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar
page 126 sensor.
Increase distance, refer to Switching on/off and interrupting

page 126 cruise control
Rocker switch:
Switching on
Maintaining/storing the speed,
refer to page 125 Press the button on the steering
wheel.
Changing, maintaining, and
storing the speed, refer to The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
page 125 light up and the mark in the speedometer is set
to the current speed.
The arrangement of the buttons varies accord‐ Cruise control can be used.
ing to the how the vehicle is equipped or coun‐
try-specific variants. Switching off
Radar sensor Deactivated or interrupted system
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper If the system is deactivated or inter‐
for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the rupted, actively intervene by braking, steering
vehicle. and, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐
curring.◀
If switching off the system while stationary,

Press the button.
▷ If active: press twice.

▷ If interrupted: press once.
124
The displays go out. The stored desired speed

and distance are deleted.
Interrupting
When active, press the button.
If interrupting the system while stationary,

The system is automatically interrupted in the Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
following situations: terrupted.
▷ When the brakes are applied.
When the system is switched on, the current
▷ When transmission position D is disen‐
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
gaged.
speed.
▷ When DTC Dynamic Traction Control is
It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly
activated or DSC is deactivated.
displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability. the instrument cluster, refer to page 127.
▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving When cruise control is maintained or stored,
Dynamics Control. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on,
▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are if necessary.
opened when the vehicle is standing still.
▷ If the system has not detected objects for Changing, maintaining, and storing
an extended period, e.g., on a road with the speed
very little traffic without road edge line The rocker switch can be pressed while the
markings. system is interrupted to maintain and store the
▷ If the detection range of the radar is dis‐ current speed. DSC Dynamic Stability Control
rupted, for example, by dirt or heavy fog. is switched on, if necessary.
Adapting the desired speed
Maintaining/storing the speed Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐
Press the button. ditions and be ready to brake at all times; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐
Or: curring.◀
Speed differences
Large differences in speed relative to ve‐
hicles ahead of the vehicle cannot be compen‐
sated by the system for example in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ When catching up rapidly with a truck.
▷ When another vehicle suddenly swerves
into the wrong lane.◀
125
The selected distance, refer to page 127, is

displayed in the instrument cluster.
Calling up the desired speed and

distance
While driving
Press the button with the system
switched on.
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set. In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
▷ When the system is switched off.
vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is
clear. ▷ When the ignition is switched off.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to

While standing
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx. Before leaving the vehicle, secure it
1 mph/1 km/h. against rolling
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
past the point of resistance, the desired ning, engage position P of the automatic trans‐
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐ mission and apply the parking brake. Other‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h. wise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the The system brought the vehicle to a complete
action. standstill.
▷ Green marking in the speedometer:
Distance
Your vehicle accelerates automatically as
Selecting a distance soon as the vehicle in the range of the ra‐
Adjust the distance according to the traf‐ dar sensor moves off.
fic and weather conditions; otherwise, there is ▷ Marking in the speedometer turns orange:
the danger of an accident occurring. Maintain no automatic driving away.
the prescribed safety distance.◀
To accelerate to the desired speed auto‐
matically, press the accelerator or press
Reduce distance the RES or SET button.
Press the button repeatedly until the Rolling bars in the distance display indicate
desired distance is set. that the vehicle in the radar sensor detection
range has moved off.
The selected distance, refer to page 127, is
displayed in the instrument cluster. Your vehicle was braked to a halt by pressing
on the brake pedal and it is standing behind
another vehicle:
Increase distance
Press the button repeatedly until the
1. Press the button to call up a stored
desired distance is set.
desired speed.
126
2. Release the brake pedal. Distance display

3. Press on the accelerator briefly, or press
The system has been interrupted or
the RES rocker switch when the vehicle
distance control is deactivated be‐
ahead of you drives away.
cause the accelerator pedal is being
pressed; a vehicle was not detected.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Distance control is deactivated be‐
Desired speed cause the accelerator pedal is being
▷ The marking lights up green: pressed; a vehicle was detected.
the system is active. Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven
▷ The marking lights up or‐ away.
ange: the system has been
interrupted.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system
is switched off. Personal responsibility
The indicator and warning lamps do not
relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt
Brief status display his or her desired driving speed and style to
Selected desired speed. the traffic conditions.◀
The vehicle symbol lights up orange:

If --- appears briefly on the display for Check A vehicle has been detected ahead of
Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐ you.
tem requirements for operation are currently
not met. The vehicle symbol flashes orange:
The conditions are not adequate for
Distance to vehicle ahead of you operating the system.
The selected distance to the vehicle driving The system was deactivated but applies the
ahead of you is shown. brakes until you actively resume control by
Distance display pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal.
Distance 1
The vehicle symbol flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds:
Distance 2 You are requested to intervene by
braking or making an evasive maneuver.
Distance 3
System limits
Distance 4 Speed range

This value is set after the system is Best results are achieved when using the sys‐
switched on. tem on well-developed roads and highways.
The system is functional at speeds beginning
at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
127
The maximum speed that can be set depends No warnings

on the vehicle. A warning may not be issued when ap‐
The system can also be activated when sta‐ proaching a stationary or very slow-moving ob‐
tionary. stacle. You must react yourself; otherwise,
Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit‐ there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
uation when using the system.
Swerving vehicles
Detection range
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected

The detection capacity of the system and the until it is completely within the same lane as
automatic braking capacity are limited. your vehicle.
Two-wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you
for instance might not be detected. Swerving vehicles
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
Limited detection capacity swerves into your lane, the system may not be
Because of the limits to the detection ca‐ able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
pacity of the camera and the sensor, you tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐
should be alert at all times so that you can in‐ ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g.,
tervene actively, if necessary; otherwise, there when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve‐
is the danger of an accident occurring.◀ hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected,
the system requests that the driver intervene
by braking and carrying out evasive maneu‐
Deceleration vers, if necessary. You must react yourself;
The system does not decelerate when a sta‐ otherwise, there is the danger of an accident
tionary obstacle is located in the same lane, occurring.◀
e.g., a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end
of traffic congestion.
The system also does not respond to:
▷ Pedestrians or similar slow-moving road
users.
▷ Red traffic lights.
▷ Stationary objects.
▷ Cross traffic.
▷ Oncoming traffic.
128
Unexpected lane change
When approaching a curve, the system may

react briefly to the vehicles in the next lane due
If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves
to the bend of the curve. Any deceleration of
into another lane from behind a stopped vehi‐
the vehicle by the system can be compensated
cle, you yourself must react, as the system
for by briefly accelerating. After the accelerator
does not react to stopped vehicles.
pedal is released, the system becomes active
again and independently controls the speed.
Cornering
Driving away
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive
away automatically, e.g., on steep inclines or
behind bumps in the road.
Radar sensor
For US owners only

If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
speed is reduced slightly in the curve, although Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
curves cannot be anticipated in advance. erned by the following:
Therefore, drive into a curve at an appropriate
FCC ID:
speed.
▷ OAYARS3-A
In tight curves, situations may result due to the
restricted detection range of the system in Compliance statement:
which a vehicle driving ahead of you may not This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
be detected at all, or not until after a consider‐ Rules. Operation is subject to the following
able delay. two conditions:
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
129
Malfunction At a glance
The system cannot be activated if the radar
sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be Buttons on the steering wheel
caused by damage incurred during parking, for
example. Press the button Function
A Check Control message is displayed if the System on/off, interrupt
system fails.
Store speed
Cruise control
Resume speed
The concept
The system is functional at speeds beginning Rocker switch: change,
at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. hold, store speed
It maintains the speed that was set using the
control elements on the steering wheel. Controls
The system brakes on downhill gradients if en‐
gine braking action is insufficient. Switching on
Unfavorable conditions Press the button on the steering
wheel.
Do not use the system if unfavorable
conditions make it impossible to drive at a con‐ The marking in the speedometer is set to the
stant speed, for instance: current speed.
▷ On curvy roads. Cruise control can be used.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or Switching off
on a loose road surface. Deactivated or interrupted system
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi‐ If the system is deactivated or inter‐
cle and cause an accident.◀ rupted, actively intervene by braking and, if
necessary, with evasive maneuvers; otherwise,
General information there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Depending on the set driving program, the Press the button.
characteristics of the cruise control can
change in certain areas.
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Interrupting
When active, press the button.
The system is automatically interrupted if:
130
▷ The brakes are applied. Adapting the desired speed

▷ The clutch pedal is depressed for a few Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐
seconds or released while a gear is not en‐ ditions and be ready to brake at all times; oth‐
gaged. erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐
▷ The gear engaged is too high for the cur‐ curring.◀
rent speed.
▷ The transmission position D is disengaged.
▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
or DSC is deactivated.
▷ DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving
Dynamics Control.
Maintaining/storing the current speed

Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
Press the button. until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
Or vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is
clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐ The maximum speed that can be set de‐
terrupted. pends on the vehicle.
When the system is switched on, the current ▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐
speed is maintained and stored as the desired ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐
speed. celerates the vehicle without requiring
It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly pressure on the accelerator pedal. After
displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in the rocker switch is released, the vehicle
the speedometer, refer to page 132. maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes
When cruise control is maintained or stored, the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on,
if necessary.
Resuming the desired speed
Changing/maintaining speed Press the button.
The rocker switch can be pressed while the
system is interrupted in order to maintain and The stored speed is reached and maintained.
store the current speed.
131
Displays in the instrument cluster ▷ By the front middle sensors and the two
corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.
Indicator lamp ▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐ 5 ft/1.50 m.
ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐ To ensure full operability:
ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐ ▷ Do not cover sensors, e.g., by stickers, bi‐
tem is switched on. cycle racks and the like.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
Desired speed ▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
▷ The marking lights up green: spray the sensors for long periods and
the system is active. maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
▷ The marking lights up or‐
ange: the system has been Hints
interrupted. Personal responsibility
▷ The marking does not light up: the system Even an active system does not relieve
is switched off. the driver from personal responsibility for the
driving process.
Brief status display Because of technical system limits, the system
cannot independently react appropriately in all
Selected desired speed.
traffic situations.
Continuously and attentively monitor the driv‐
If --- appears briefly on the display for Check ing process, the area surrounding the vehicle
Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐ and the traffic situation, and actively intervene
tem requirements for operation are currently when required, otherwise, there is a risk of an
not met. accident.◀
Avoid driving quickly with PDC

PDC Park Distance Control Avoid approaching an object quickly.
Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet
The concept active.
PDC supports you when parking. Objects that For technical reasons, the system may other‐
you are approaching slowly in front of or be‐ wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀
hind your vehicle are indicated with:
▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.
General information
Measurements are made by ultrasound sen‐
sors in the bumpers.
The range, depending on the environment, is
approx. 6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given:
132
At a glance Display
Button in the vehicle Signal tones

When approaching an object, an intermittent
tone is sounded that indicates the position of
the object. For example, if an object is de‐
tected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal
tone sounds from the left rear speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object be‐
comes, the shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is
PDC Park Distance Control sounded.
If objects are located both in front of and be‐
hind the vehicle, an alternating continuous sig‐
Switching on/off nal is sounded.
The signal tone is switched off:
▷ When the vehicle moves away from an ob‐
Select transmission position R with the engine
ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm.
running.
▷ When transmission position P is engaged.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel Volume
The system switches off when a certain driving The volume of the PDC signal can be adjusted,
distance or speed is exceeded. refer to user's manual for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication.
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Switching on/off manually currently in use.
Press the button. Visual warning

The approach of the vehicle to an object can
▷ On: the LED lights up. be shown on the Control Display. Objects that
▷ Off: the LED goes out. are farther away are displayed on the Control
In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control, Display before a signal tone sounds.
the rearview camera, refer to page 135, can be A display appears as soon as Park Distance
switched on. Control (PDC) is activated.
The range of the sensors is represented in the
Switching on the rearview camera via colors red, green and yellow.
the iDrive
If the rearview camera image was selected last,
With PDC activated or Top View switched on: it again appears on the display. To switch to
"Rear view camera" PDC:
The rearview camera image is displayed. The 1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol
setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ on the Control Display.
rently in use.
133
2. Press the controller. ▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered in

The setting is stored for the remote control ice.
currently in use. ▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
System limits
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed
bumps.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
The detection of objects can reach the physi‐
smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐
cal limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g., in
rages.
the following circumstances:
▷ In heavy exhaust.
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.
sweeping machines, high pressure steam
coats.
cleaners or neon lights.
▷ If there is an external disturbance of the ul‐
The malfunction is signaled by a continu‐
trasound, e.g. from passing vehicles or
ous tone alternating between the front and
loud machines.
rear speakers. As soon as the malfunction
▷ When sensors are soiled, iced over or dam‐ due to other ultrasound sources is no lon‐
aged. ger present, the system is again fully func‐
▷ Under certain weather conditions, e.g., tional.
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall or
strong wind. Malfunction
▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches of other A Check Control message is displayed.
vehicles. The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. area on the Control Display.
▷ With moving objects. PDC has failed. Have the system checked.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as To ensure full operability:
ledges or cargo. ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. ▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure, spray the sensors for long periods and
such as fences. maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before Surround View
or after a continuous tone sounds.
The concept
False warnings Surround View comprises various camera as‐
sistance systems that help the driver when
PDC may issue a warning under the following
parking, maneuvering, and at complex exits
conditions even though there is no obstacle
and intersections.
within the detection range:
▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 135
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ Side View, refer to page 137.
▷ Top View, refer to page 138.
134
Rearview camera Camera
The concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control
Display.
Hints
Check the traffic situation as well
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
trunk lid. The image quality may be impaired
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐
by dirt.
dent could result from road users or objects lo‐
cated outside the picture area of the backup Clean the lens, refer to page 221.
camera.◀
Switching on/off
At a glance
Button in the vehicle Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the
system was switched on via the iDrive.

travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Rearview camera
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.

The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
Switching on the rearview camera via

the iDrive
With PDC activated or Top View switched on:
"Rear view camera"
135
The rearview camera image is displayed. The Turning circle lines

setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The trunk lid is fully closed.
Activating the assistance functions ▷ Can be shown in the rearview camera im‐
More than one assistance function can be ac‐ age.
tive at the same time. ▷ Show the course of the smallest possible
▷ Parking aid lines turning circle on a level road.
"Parking aid lines" ▷ Only one turning circle line is displayed af‐
Pathway and turning circle lines are dis‐ ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer‐
played. tain angle.
▷ Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking" Obstacle marking
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed. General information
Pathway lines
Marks for detected obstacles can be shown in

the rearview camera image.
▷ Can be shown in the rearview camera im‐
age when in drive mode R. Their colored steps match the markings of the
PDC. This simplifies estimation of the distance
▷ Help you to estimate the space required to the object shown.
when parking and maneuvering on level
roads.
▷ Are dependent on the current steering an‐
gle and are continuously adjusted to the
steering wheel movements.
136
Parking using pathway and turning System limits

circle lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning cir‐ Detection of objects
cle lines lead to within the limits of the Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
parking space. objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
Assistance functions also take into account
data of the PDC.
Follow instructions in the PDC chapter, refer to
page 132.
The objects displayed in the Control Display
under certain circumstances are closer than
they appear. Therefore, do not estimate the
distance from the objects on the display.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning circle line. Side View
The concept
Side View provides an early look at cross traffic
at blind driveways and intersections. Road
users concealed by obstacles to the left and
right of the vehicle can only be detected rela‐
tively late from the driver's seat. To improve
visibility, two cameras in the front of the vehi‐
cle record the traffic situation on each side.
Display settings Notes

The images from both cameras are shown si‐
Brightness multaneously on the Control Display.
With the rearview camera switched on: Check the traffic situation as well
1. Select the symbol. Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting hicle on blind driveways and intersections with
is reached, and press the controller. your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could
result from road users or objects located out‐
Contrast side the picture area of the Side View cam‐
eras.◀
With the rearview camera switched on:
1. Select the symbol.

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
137
At a glance Switch the system back on if necessary.
Button in the vehicle Display

The traffic area to the left and right is displayed
on the Control Display.
Side View
Guidelines at the bottom of the image show

Cameras the position of the front of the vehicle.
Brightness
With the Side View switched on:
1. "Brightness"
Contrast
Two cameras integrated in the bumpers cap‐ With the Side View switched on:
ture the image.
1. "Contrast"
The two camera lenses are located on the
sides of the bumper. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
Clean the lens, refer to page 221. System limits
The cameras capture a maximum range of
Switching on/off 330 ft/100 m.
Switching on/off manually

Press the button. Top View
The concept
Automatic deactivation during forward Top View provides assistance in parking and
travel maneuvering. The area around the doors and
The system switches off when a certain driving the road area around the vehicle are shown on
distance or speed is exceeded. the Control Display for this purpose.
138
General information Cameras

The image is captured by two cameras
integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the
backup camera.
The range is at least 7 ft/2 m to the side and
rear.
In this way, obstacles up to the height of the
exterior mirrors are detected early.
Notes
The lenses of the Top View cameras are lo‐
cated at the bottom of the exterior mirror hous‐
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ ings. The image quality may be impaired by
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐ dirt.
dent could result from road users or objects lo‐
Clean the lens, refer to page 221.
cated outside the picture area of the
cameras.◀
Switching on/off
At a glance
Button in the vehicle Select drive mode R with the engine running.
The Top View and PDC images are displayed if
the system is switched on via iDrive.

travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Top View Switching on/off manually

Press the button.

Top View is displayed.
Switching on the backup camera via

the iDrive
With Top View switched on:
"Rear view camera"
139
The backup camera image is displayed. The Displaying the turning circle and
setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ pathway lines
rently in use. ▷ The static, red turning circle line shows the
space needed to the side of the vehicle
Display when the steering wheel is turned all the
way.
Visual warning
▷ The variable, green pathway line assists
The approach of the vehicle to an object can you in assessing the amount of space ac‐
be shown on the Control Display. tually needed to the side of the vehicle.
When the distance to an object is small, a red The lane line depends on the engaged
bar is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in drive mode and the current steering angle.
the PDC display. The track line is continuously adjusted for
the steering wheel movement.
"Parking aid lines"
Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.
System limits
Top View cannot be used in the following sit‐
uations:
▷ With a door open.
The display appears as soon as Top View is ▷ With the trunk lid open.
activated. ▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.
If the rearview camera image was selected last, ▷ In poor light.

it again appears on the display when reverse A Check Control message is displayed in some
gear is selected. To switch to Top View: of these situations.
"Rear view camera" Select the symbol on
the Control Display.
Parking assistant
currently in use.
The concept
Brightness

Contrast
This system assists the driver in parking paral‐
lel to the road.
140
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces Curbs

on both sides of the vehicle. The parking assistant may steer the vehi‐
The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐ cle over or onto curbs.
sible parking line and takes control of steering Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
during the parking procedure. vene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehi‐
When parking, also take note of the visual and cle may become damaged.◀
acoustic information and instructions issued
An engine that has been switched off by the
by the PDC, the parking assistant and the rear‐
Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐
view camera and react accordingly.
cally when the parking assistant is activated.
A component of the parking assistant is the
PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 132. Requirements
Hints For measuring parking spaces

Personal responsibility ▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
Even an active system does not relieve prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
the driver from personal responsibility for the ▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐
driving process. cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Because of technical system limits, the system
cannot independently react appropriately in all Suitable parking space
traffic situations. ▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
Continuously and attentively monitor the driv‐ length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
ing process, the area surrounding the vehicle ▷ Minimum length of the gap: own vehicle's
and the traffic situation, and actively intervene length plus approx. 4 ft/1.2 m.
when required, otherwise, there is a risk of an ▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
accident.◀
Changes to the parking space For parking procedure

Changes to the parking space after it was ▷ Doors and trunk lid closed.
measured are not taken into account by the ▷ Parking brake released.
system. ▷ When parking in parking spaces on the
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ driver's side, the corresponding turn signal
vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐ must be set where applicable.
dent occurring.◀
Transporting loads
Loads that extend beyond the perimeter
of the vehicle are not taken into account by the
system during the parking procedure.
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐
dent occurring.◀
141
At a glance Switching on with the reverse gear

Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
Activate: "Parking Assistant" Select the
symbol in the Control Display.
Switching off
The system can be deactivated as follows:
▷ Press the button.
▷ Switch off the ignition.

Parking assistant

Ultrasound sensors
System activated/deactivated
Symbol Meaning
Gray: the system is not available.

White: the system is available but
not activated.
The system is activated.
The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking Status display

spaces are located on the wheel arches. Depending on the appointment version, differ‐
To ensure full operability: ent views of the status display are shown and
are described below as View 1, refer to
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
page 142, or View 2, refer to page 143.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and Status of the system, Display 1
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Switching on/off
Switching on with the button

Press the button.
The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space search

is indicated on the Control Display. The status is displayed with symbols.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.
142
Gray: parking space search. road as on the Control Display. When the
Blue: the system is activated. A parking assistant is active, suitable parking
suitable parking space was spaces are highlighted.
found. ▷ The parking procedure is ac‐
tive. Steering control has
The parking procedure is active. been seized.
Steering control has been
seized.
▷ Parking space search is always active
whenever the vehicle is moving forwards
slow and straight, even if the system is de‐
Status of the parking space search activated. When the system is deactivated,
the displays on the Control Display are
shown in gray.
Parking using the parking assistant

Loud sounds outside and within the vehi‐
cle can drown out the signal tones of the park‐
ing assistant and PDC.
Check the traffic situation around the vehicle
▷ Gray, arrow 1: parking space search. with your own eyes; otherwise, there is the
▷ Blue, arrow 2: parking space is suitable. danger of an accident.◀
The vehicle is parked in the parking space 1. Switch on the parking assistant and acti‐
if the parking procedure is active. vate it if necessary.
▷ No display: no parking space search. The status of the parking space search is
indicated on the Control Display.
Status of the system, Display 2
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
To achieve the best possible parking posi‐
tion, wait for the automatic steering wheel
movement as required after the gear
change when the vehicle is stationary.
The end of the parking procedure is indi‐
cated on the Control Display.
3. Adjust the parking position yourself if nec‐
essary.
▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side
of the vehicle representation. Parking as‐
sistant is activated and search for parking
Interrupting manually
space active. The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
time:
▷ Suitable parking spaces are displayed next
to the vehicle symbol at the edge of the
143
▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol ▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
on the Control Display. roads.
▷ Press the button. ▷ On slippery ground.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ When leaves or snow has collected in the
Interrupting automatically
parking space.
The system is interrupted automatically in the
following situations: Limits of ultrasonic measurement
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if The detection of objects can reach the physi‐
he takes over steering. cal limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g., in
▷ If a gear is selected that does not match the following circumstances:
the instruction on the Control Display. ▷ For small children and animals.
▷ If a turn signal is activated in the opposite ▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.
direction to the desired side for parking. coats.
▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. ▷ If there is an external disturbance of the ul‐
6 mph/10 km/h. trasound, e.g. from passing vehicles or
▷ On snow-covered or slippery road surfaces loud machines.
if necessary. ▷ When sensors are soiled, iced over or dam‐
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to aged.
overcome, such as curbs. ▷ Under certain weather conditions, e.g.,
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly high relative humidity, rain, snowfall or
arise. strong wind.
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts ▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches of other
or the time taken for parking is exceeded. vehicles.
A Check Control message is displayed. ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
Continuing
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐ ledges or cargo.
tinued if necessary.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
Follow the instructions on the Control Display
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure,
to do this.
such as fences.
System limits ▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
No parking assistance move into the blind area of the sensors before
The parking assistant does not offer assis‐ or after a continuous tone sounds.
tance in the following situations: The parking assistant may identify parking
▷ In tight curves. spaces that are not suitable for parking.
Functional limitations Malfunction

The system may not be fully functional in the A Check Control message is displayed.
144
The parking assistant failed. Have the system

checked.
145
Controls Climate control
Climate control
Automatic climate control with enhanced features
1 Seat heating, left 54 10 Air distribution, right

2 Temperature, left 11 Air flow, AUTO intensity
3 AUTO program 12 Air distribution, left
4 Display 13 Rear window defroster
5 Maximum cooling 14 Interior temperature sensor — always keep
6 Temperature, right clear
7 Seat heating, right 54 15 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐

sation
8 Cooling function
9 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐
lated-air mode
146
Climate control Controls
Climate control functions in detail Maximum cooling

Press the button.
Temperature
The system is set to the lowest tem‐
Turn the wheel to set the de‐ perature, maximum air flow and air circulation
sired temperature. mode.
Air flows out of the vents for the upper body

region. The vents need to be open for this.
The automatic climate control reaches this The function is available above an external
temperature as quickly as possible, if neces‐ temperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
sary by increasing the cooling or heating out‐ engine running or when electrical drive readi‐
put, and then keeps it constant. ness is indicated.
Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐ The air flow can be adjusted when the program
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐ is active.
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
just the set temperature. Cooling function
The passenger compartment can be cooled
AUTO program with the engine running or switched off.
Press the button. Press the button.
Air flow, air distribution, and tempera‐ The air is cooled and dehumidified
ture are controlled automatically. and, depending on the temperature setting,
warmed again.
Depending on the selected temperature,
AUTO intensity program and outside influen‐ Depending on the weather, the windshield may
ces, the air is directed to the windshield, side fog up briefly when the engine is started.
windows, upper body, and into the footwell.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
The cooling function, refer to page 147, is cally with the AUTO program.
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
When using the automatic climate control,
gram.
condensation water, refer to page 170, devel‐
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐ ops that exits underneath the vehicle.
trols the program so as to prevent window
condensation as much as possible. Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
Intensity of the AUTO program
You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
With the AUTO program switched on, auto‐ tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
matic control of the air flow and air distribution rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
can be adjusted. system then recirculates the air currently
Press the left or right side of the but‐ within the vehicle.
ton: decrease or increase the inten‐ Press the button repeatedly to select
sity. an operating mode:
The selected intensity is shown on the display ▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
of the automatic climate control.
147
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air The selected air flow is shown on the display of
control: a sensor detects pollutants in the the automatic climate control.
outside air and controls the shutoff auto‐ The air flow of the automatic climate control
matically. may be reduced automatically to save battery
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the power.
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
manently blocked. Rear window defroster
Recirculated air mode switches off automati‐ Press the button.
cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐
The rear window defroster switches
tain amount of time in order to window fog‐
off automatically after a certain period of time.
ging.
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the
recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO Defrosting windows and removing
button to utilize the condensation sensor. condensation
Make sure that air can flow onto the wind‐ Press the button.
shield. Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
Continuous recirculated-air mode moved from the windshield and the front side
The recirculated-air mode should not be windows.
used for an extended period of time, as the air The air volume can be adjusted when the pro‐
quality inside the vehicle deteriorates stead‐ gram is active.
ily.◀
If the windows are fogged over, you can also
switch on the cooling function or press the
Manual air distribution AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
Press the button repeatedly to select sor.
a program:
Switching the system on/off
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Upper body region and footwell. Switching off
▷ Footwell. Press the left button for the minimum
▷ Windows and footwell: driver's side only. speed.
▷ Windows, upper body region and footwell:
driver's side only. Switching on
If the windows are fogged over, press the Press any button except
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐ ▷ Rear window defroster.
sor.
▷ Seat heating.
Air flow, manual
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
To be able to manually adjust the air flow,
In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐
switch off the AUTO program first.
crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust,
Press the left or right side of the but‐ pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
148
This filter should be replaced during scheduled Ventilation in the rear

maintenance, refer to page 199, of your vehi‐
cle.
Ventilation
Front ventilation
▷ Thumbwheel for continuous opening and

closing of the vents, arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature, ar‐
row 2.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1. arrow 3.
▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
vents continuously, arrows 2.
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature, ar‐ Parked-car ventilation
row 3.
Toward blue: colder. The concept
Toward red: warmer. The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐
cle interior and lowers its temperature, if nec‐
essary.
Adjusting the ventilation
The system can be switched on and off at any
▷ Ventilation for cooling: external temperature, either directly or by us‐
Adjust the vent to direct the air in your di‐ ing two preset switch-on times. It remains
rection, such as if the vehicle interior is hot switched on for 30 minutes.
from the sun. Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
▷ Draft-free ventilation:
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you. Switching on/off directly
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate comf. ventilation"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes if the system is switched on.
149
Preselecting the switch-on time The symbol appears on the automatic cli‐
1. "Settings" mate Control Display.
2. "Climate" The interior temperature, air volume and air

distribution can be adjusted with the radio
3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
ready state switched on.
4. Set the desired time.
Switching off
Activating the switch-on time
At the lowest fan speed, press the left
1. "Settings" side of the button on the driver's side.
2. "Climate"
The symbol on the automatic climate Con‐
3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2"
trol Display disappears.
trol lights up when the switch-on time is acti‐
vated.
Auxiliary air conditioning
trol flashes when the system has been The concept
switched on.
To cool the heated passenger compartment
The system will only be switched on within the immediately before starting to drive, the auto‐
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐ matic climate control can be activated via a re‐
vated. mote control.
The automatic climate control reduces the in‐
terior temperature with high cooling power for
Residual cooling approx. two minutes.
When the automatic climate control has re‐ The auxiliary air conditioning can be switched
duced the interior temperature, this tempera‐ on or off using the remote control.
ture can also be maintained after the combus‐
tion engine has been switched off. This Remote control
function can be activated up to 15 minutes af‐
ter the engine is switched off and for a maxi‐ The concept
mum period of 6 minutes. If the high-voltage battery is sufficiently
charged, the auxiliary air conditioning can be
Functional requirement activated for two minutes using the remote
▷ The high-voltage battery is sufficiently control.
charged.
▷ External temperature at least ap‐
prox. 59 ℉/15 ℃.
Switching on
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Press the right side of the button

on the driver's side.
150
At a glance
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Opening the trunk lid
4 Panic mode, auxiliary air conditioning
Remote control range

The average range is the range when the vehi‐
cle is locked/unlocked.
Switching on
Press the button on the remote con‐
trol for approx. 1 second. You can hear
that the air conditioning starts to run.
The symbol is displayed on the air condi‐

tioning system.
Switching off
The function switches off automatically after
approx. two minutes or when the ignition is
switched on.
151
Controls Interior equipment
Interior equipment
Vehicle equipment ally compatible with the universal garage door
opener.
If you have any questions, please contact:
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ▷ Your service center.
ment is also described that is not available in a ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
equipment or country variant. This also applies HomeLink is a registered trademark of John‐
for safety-related functions and systems. son Controls, Inc.
Controls on the interior rearview

Universal garage door mirror
opener
The concept
The universal garage door opener can operate
up to 3 functions of remote-controlled sys‐
tems such as garage door drives or lighting
systems. The universal garage door opener re‐
places up to 3 different hand-held transmitters.
To operate the remote control, the buttons on
the interior rearview mirror must be program‐ ▷ LED, arrow 1.
med with the desired functions. The hand-held ▷ Buttons, arrow 2.
transmitter for the particular system is required
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
in order to program the remote control.
quired for programming.
During programming
During programming and before activat‐ Programming
ing a device using the integrated universal re‐
mote control, ensure that there are no people, General information
animals, or objects in the range of movement
of the remote-controlled device; otherwise,
there is a risk of injury or damage. 2. Initial setup:
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- Press and hold the left and right button on
held transmitter.◀ the interior rearview mirror simultaneously
for approximately 20 seconds until the LED
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This
functions for the sake of security. erases all programming of the buttons on
the interior rearview mirror.
Compatibility
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐
If this symbol is printed on the packag‐ tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to
ing or in the instructions of the system 8 cm away from the buttons on the interior
to be controlled, the system is gener‐
152
Interior equipment Controls
rearview mirror. The required distance de‐ and continuous illumination of the LED will re‐
pends on the manual transmitter. peat for approximately 20 seconds.
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button For systems with an alternating-code system,
of the desired function on the hand-held the universal garage door opener and the sys‐
transmitter and the button to be program‐ tem also have to be synchronized.
med on the interior rearview mirror. The Please read the operating manual of the sys‐
LED on the interior rearview mirror will be‐ tem being set up for information on how to
gin flashing slowly. synchronize the system.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐
flashes more rapidly. When the LED is ond person.
flashing faster, this indicates that the but‐
To synchronize:
ton on the interior rearview mirror has been
programmed. 1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
If the LED does not flash faster after at mote-controlled system.
least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐ 2. Program the relevant button on the interior
tween the interior rearview mirror and the rearview mirror as described.
hand-held transmitter and repeat the step. 3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
Several more attempts at different distan‐ on the system being programmed. You
ces may be necessary. Wait at least have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
15 seconds between attempts.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the
Canada: if programming with the hand- interior rearview mirror for approximately
held transmitter was interrupted, hold 3 seconds and then release it. If necessary,
down the interior rearview mirror button repeat this work step up to three times in
and repeatedly press and release the order to finish synchronization. Once syn‐
hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐ chronization is complete, the programmed
onds. function will be carried out.
6. To program other functions on other but‐
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5. Reprogramming individual buttons
The systems can be controlled using the inte‐ 1. Switch on the ignition.
rior rearview mirror buttons. 2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror
button to be programmed.
Special feature of the alternating-
3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED
code wireless system
starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held
If you are unable to operate the system after transmitter for the system to be controlled
repeated programming, please check if the approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the
system to be controlled features an alternat‐ buttons on the interior rearview mirror. The
ing-code system. required distance depends on the manual
Read the system's operating manual, or press transmitter.
the programmed button on the interior rear‐ 4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the
view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior desired function on the hand-held trans‐
rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then mitter.
stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system
features an alternating-code system. Flashing 5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐
rior rearview mirror LED flashes more rap‐
idly. When the LED is flashing faster, this
153
indicates that the button on the interior Digital compass

rearview mirror has been programmed.
The system can then be controlled by the At a glance
button on the interior rearview mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the step. Several more attempts at
different distances may be necessary. Wait
at least 15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior rearview mirror button
and repeatedly press and release the
1 Control button
hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐
onds. 2 Mirror display
Controls Mirror display

Before operation The point of the compass is displayed in the
Before operating a system using the mirror when driving straight.
integrated universal remote control, ensure
that there are no people, animals, or objects Operating concept
within the range of movement of the remote- Various functions can be called up by pressing
controlled system; otherwise, there is a risk of the control button with a pointed object, such
injury or damage. as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object.
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- The following setting options are displayed in
held transmitter.◀ succession, depending on how long the con‐
trol button is pressed:
The system, such as the garage door, can be
▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
operated using the button on the interior rear‐
view mirror while the engine is running or when ▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
the ignition is started. To do this, hold down ▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
the button within receiving range of the system ▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
until the function is activated. The interior rear‐ setting.
view mirror LED stays lit while the wireless sig‐
▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
nal is being transmitted.
Deleting stored functions Setting the compass zones

Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐
Press and hold the left and right button on the
cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐
interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐
fer to World map with compass zones.
proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes
rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The
functions cannot be deleted individually.
154
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐ 1. Make sure that there are no large metallic
prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the objects or overhead power lines near the
set compass zone appears in the mirror. vehicle and that there is sufficient room to
2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐ drive around in a circle.
trol button quickly and repeatedly until the 2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
number of the compass zone correspond‐ 3. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
ing to your location appears in the mirror. prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears
The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐ on the display. Next, drive in a complete
pass is ready for use again after approximately circle at least once at a speed of no more
10 seconds. than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc‐
cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points of
Calibrating the digital compass the compass.
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
event of the following: Left/right-hand steering
▷ The wrong point of the compass is dis‐ The digital compass is already set for right or
played. left-hand steering at the factory.
▷ The point of the compass displayed does
Setting the language
not change despite changing the direction
of travel. Press and hold the control button for approx.
12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control
▷ Not all points of the compass are dis‐
button again to switch between English "E"
played.
and German "O".
155
The setting is stored automatically after ap‐

proximately 10 seconds.
Ashtray/cigarette lighter
Ashtray
Opening
The lighter is located next to the ashtray.
Push in the lighter.

The lighter can be removed as
soon as it pops back out.
Connecting electrical
Raise cover.
devices
Emptying Hints
Take out the insert. Do not plug chargers into the socket
Do not connect battery chargers to the
Lighter
factory-installed sockets in the vehicle as this
Danger of burns may damage the battery.◀
Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐
Replace the cover after use
erwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after
Switch off the ignition and take the remote
use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter
control with you when leaving the vehicle so
socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀
that children cannot use the lighter and burn
themselves.◀
Sockets
Replace the cover after use The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after electrical equipment while the engine is run‐
use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter ning or when the ignition is switched on. The
socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀ total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable
connectors.
156
Front center console In the cargo area
Raise the cap and remove the cover or ciga‐ The socket is located on the left side in the
rette lighter. cargo area.
In the front passenger footwell

USB interface for data
transfer
The concept
Connection for importing and exporting data
on USB devices, e.g.:
▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 38.
▷ Music collection.
The socket is located below the glove com‐ ▷ Importing Trips.

partment.
Without Professional navigation
system or TV: at a glance
Rear center console
The USB interface is located in the glove com‐

Remove the cover. partment.
157
With Professional navigation system Hints

or TV: at a glance Danger of pinching
Before folding down the rear seat back‐
rests, ensure that the area of movement of the
backrests is clear. In particular, ensure that no
one is located in or reaches into the area of
movement of the rear seat backrests when the
middle section is folded down. Otherwise, in‐
jury or damage may result.◀
Lock the rear seat backrests in position

The USB interface is located in the center arm‐ Before installation of child restraint sys‐
rest. tems on the rear seat backrest, set a backrest
tilt at which the childseat rests firmly against
the backrest and securely latch all backrests.
Notes Otherwise, the stability of the child seat is lim‐
Observe the following when connecting: ited, and there is an increased risk of injury be‐
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐ cause of unexpected movement of the rear
nector into the USB interface. seat backrest.◀
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or Retract the head restraint if necessary
lamps to the USB interface. before backrest is folded down
▷ Do not connect USB hard drives. With folding head restraints, fold in the head
▷ Do not use the USB interface to recharge restraints before folding down the backrests,
external devices. or damage may result.◀
Opening
Through-loading system 1. Unlock the belt lock of the center safety
belt in the rear using the latch plate of an‐
The concept
other safety belt.
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding
2. Insert the latch plate at the end of the belt
down the rear seat backrest.
into the specially designated fixture on the
The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts rear window shelf.
at a ratio of 60 to 40.
If equipped with through-loading system: the
rear seat backrest is divided in the ratio 40–20–
40.
The sides can be folded down separately or to‐
gether.
3. Push the corresponding head restraint

down as far as it will go.
158
4. Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo Folding down the middle section
area to release the rear seat backrest. 1. Fold in the middle head restraint.
2. Reach into the recess and pull the middle
section forward.
5. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves

forward slightly.
6. Fold backrest forward.
Closing
1. Return the rear seat backrest to the upright
seating position and engage it.
Ensure that the lock is securely en‐
gaged
Make sure that the lock engages properly
when folding back, otherwise transported
cargo could enter the passenger compart‐
ment during braking or evasive maneuvers
and endanger the vehicle occupants.◀
2. Release the belt tongue from the fixture on

the rear window shelf.
3. Insert the belt tongue in the belt lock of the
center safety belt. Make sure you hear the
latch plate engage.
To secure cargo, refer to page 172, with nets
or draw straps, the cargo area is fitted with
lashing eyes.
159
Controls Storage compartments
Storage compartments
Vehicle equipment ▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to
page 161.
▷ Nets on the backrests of the front seats.
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional Glove compartment
for safety-related functions and systems. Front passenger side
Note
Notes Close the glove compartment again im‐
mediately
No loose objects in the passenger com‐
partment Close the glove compartment immediately af‐
ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐
Do not stow any objects in the passenger
cur during accidents.◀
compartment without securing them; other‐
wise, they may present a danger to occupants
for instance during braking and avoidance ma‐ Opening
neuvers.◀
Do not place anti-slip mats on the dash‐

board
Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard.
The mat materials could damage the dash‐
board.◀
Storage compartments Pull the handle.

The following storage compartments are avail‐ The light in the glove compartment switches
able in the vehicle interior: on.
▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side, The net in the glove compartment is provided
refer to page 161. for stowing the storage tray for the cupholder,
refer to page 162.
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 160.
▷ Without Smoker's package: Front storage Closing
compartment, in front of the cupholders, Fold cover closed.
refer to page 161.
▷ Storage compartment in the front center
armrest, refer to page 161.
160
Storage compartments Controls
Locking Front storage compartment

The glove compartment can be locked with an
integrated key to separately secure the trunk
lid, refer to page 43, for example.
This prevents access to the glove compart‐
ment and to the cargo area.
After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed over, such as at a
hotel, without the integrated key.
Driver's side Raise the lid to open it.
Note
Close the glove compartment again im‐
Compartments in the doors
mediately
Close the glove compartment immediately af‐ Do not stow any breakable objects
ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐ Do not store any breakable objects, e. g.
cur during accidents.◀ glass bottles, in the compartments, or there is
an increased risk of injury in the event of an ac‐
cident.◀
Opening
Center armrest
Front
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the front seats.
Opening
Pull the handle.
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Fold the center armrest up.
Repositioning
Center armrest can be pushed forwards or
backwards. It engages in the end positions.
161
Controls Storage compartments
Connection for an external audio into the net so that the top surface faces up.
device Note the trapezoidal shape of the net and tray.
.
Rear
In the center armrest.
Cupholders
Hints
Shatter-proof containers and no hot
drinks
Use light and shatter-proof containers and do Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.
not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is To open: press the button.
the increased danger of injury in an accident.◀ To close: push both covers back in, one after
Unsuitable containers the other.
Do not forcefully push unsuitable con‐ Pushing back the covers

tainers into the cupholders. This may result in
Push back the covers before folding up
damage.◀
the center armrest; otherwise, the cupholder
could become damaged.◀
Front
Clothes hooks
The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐
dles in the rear.
Do not obstruct view
When suspending clothing from the
hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv‐
er's vision.◀
Storage tray for front cupholders No heavy objects

The cupholder with the storage tray can be Do not hang heavy objects from the
used for additional storage. To do this, place hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger
the storage tray in the cupholder. to passengers during braking and evasive ma‐
Only use the storage tray for small objects, neuvers.◀
such as keys or the remote control.
When not in use, stow the storage tray in the
glove compartment net. Insert the storage tray
162
Storage compartments Controls
Storage compartments in the Floor net

cargo area The floor net can also be used to Secure the
load, refer to page 172, and to store small
Storage compartment parts.
A storage compartment is located on the left
side.
Storage compartment under cargo
floor panel
Net Maximum load
Small objects can be stowed in the net on the To avoid damage to the vehicle, do not
left side. exceed a maximum permitted load of 44 lbs/
20 kg in the storage compartment under the
Hooks/multi-function hook cargo floor panel.◀
A multi-function hook is located on each side

of the cargo area. The multi-function hooks
can be loaded up to a max. of 8.8 lbs/4 kg.
Light and suitable objects only

Only hang light bags or suitable objects
from the holders. Otherwise, there is a danger
of objects flying about during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers.
Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it
has been appropriately secured.◀
Retaining strap
A retaining strap is available on the right side
trim for fastening small objects.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area

To secure the cargo, refer to page 172, there
are four lashing eyes in the cargo area.
163
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating modes.

Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving

Vehicle equipment Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake
discs and brake pads. Drive moderately during
this break-in period.
Following part replacement
The same breaking in procedures should be
observed if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
Breaking-in period
vehicle's operating life.
General information
Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to
each other.
Using the hybrid system
The following instructions will help achieve a
efficiently
long vehicle life and good economy.
The concept
Engine and differential Your vehicle's hybrid system runs automati‐
cally. Through foresighted driving, the hybrid
Always obey the official speed limit.
properties are efficiently used, i.e., fuel con‐
sumption and energy recovery are optimized.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road Optimizing energy recovery
speed:
▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and Types of energy recovery
100 mph/160 km/h. Energy recovery is used to charge the high-
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐ voltage battery. It is important for the supply of
stances. electrical components and thus a prerequisite
for fuel economy. It appears in three stages
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km during coasting to a halt and braking:
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full
traction potential until after an initial breaking-
in period.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km. Low energy recovery:
166
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
When coasting to a halt without pressing the The combustion engine is switched on or
brake pedal. over automatically by the hybrid system.
▷ Driving with constant speed:
With the ASSIST acceleration support, the
electric motor relieves the combustion en‐
gine periodically by being switched on au‐
tomatically.
Discharge of the high-voltage battery

In normal operation, a sufficient charging of the
high-voltage battery is ensured by energy re‐
covery.
Average energy recovery:
Longer idle periods can reduce the charge
During a slight deceleration by gently pressing
state of the high-voltage battery.
the brake pedal.
Do not allow the vehicle to sit idle for ex‐
tended periods with a low charging state
Before storing the vehicle for an extended pe‐
riod, check the battery charge indicator to en‐
sure that the high-voltage battery is fully
charged. If necessary, charge the high-voltage
battery by driving the vehicle. Check the
charge level regularly, and if necessary re‐
charge the high-voltage battery by driving the
vehicle. Allowing the high-voltage battery
Maximum energy recovery: charge to drop too low will damage the bat‐
By pressing the brake pedal harder. tery.◀
Brake according to the situation

Charging by driving
Brake in accordance with the traffic con‐
In order to charge the high-voltage battery
ditions, or there is the risk of accident.◀
most effectively when driving, activated the
transmission's Sport program DS, refer to
Optimum energy recovery page 74.
As soon as the display shows the maximum Coasting to a standstill and braking phases are
energy recovery, only press the brake pedal used more often to recover energy.
harder if required by the situation.
eDRIVE electric driving and the Auto Start
Stop function will also be deactivated.
Driving situation examples for fuel
economy
In many driving situations, the hybrid system
allows for a particularly efficient energy man‐
agement.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic:
167
Fast charging exhaust system during driving, while in idle po‐

In exceptional cases it can be charged in place, sition mode, or when parked. Such contact
such as before extended idle phases in order could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of seri‐
to prevent damage to the high-voltage battery. ous personal injury as well as property dam‐
age.
1. Start the engine.
Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise,
2. Engage transmission position P and set there is the danger of getting burned.◀
parking brake.
3. Press and hold down brake pedal. Mobile communication devices in the
4. Use the accelerator pedal to maintain an vehicle
engine speed of approx. 2,000 rpm. Mobile communication devices in the ve‐
After a few minutes, the high-voltage battery is hicle
fully charged again. It is advised that you do not use mobile com‐
The battery charge indicator in the instrument munication devices, e.g., mobile phones, in‐
cluster, refer to page 82, is used to check the side the vehicle without connecting them di‐
status. rectly to the external antenna. Otherwise, the
vehicle electronics and mobile communication
devices can interfere with each other. In addi‐
General driving notes tion, there is no assurance that the radiation
generated during transmission will be dis‐
Closing the trunk lid charged from the vehicle interior.◀
Drive with the trunk lid closed
Hydroplaning
Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐
wise, in the event of an accident or braking and On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
evasive maneuvers, passengers and other road form between the tires and road surface.
users may be injured, and the vehicle may be This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
damaged. In addition, exhaust fumes may en‐ ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
ter the passenger compartment.◀ loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
steer and brake the vehicle.
avoided:
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof. Hydroplaning
▷ Greatly increase the blower speed. When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐
duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀
▷ Drive moderately.
Hot exhaust system Driving through water

Drive through calm water only and only if it is
Hot exhaust system
not deeper than. 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this
High temperatures are generated in the height, no faster than walking speed, up to
exhaust system. 6 mph/10 km/h.
Do not remove the heat shields installed and
never apply undercoating to them. Make sure
that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves,
grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot
168
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
Adhere to water depth and speed limita‐ Ensure that this action does not endanger
tions other road users.
Do not exceed this water depth and walking The heat generated in this process helps dry
speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the the brake discs and pads.
electrical systems and the transmission may In this way braking efficiency will be available
be damaged.◀ when you need it.
Braking safely Hills

Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐ Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
ard feature. gear in which the least braking is required.
Applying the brakes fully is the most effective Otherwise, the brake system may overheat, re‐
way of braking in situations when this is neces‐ sulting in a reduction in the brake system effi‐
sary. ciency.
The vehicle maintains steering responsive‐ You can increase the engine's braking effect
ness. You can still avoid any obstacles with a by shifting down, going all the way to first gear,
minimum of steering effort. if necessary.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from Avoid load on the brakes
the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its Avoid placing excessive load on the
active mode. brake system. Light but consistent brake pres‐
sure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear
Objects within the range of movement and possibly even brake failure.◀
of the pedals
Do not drive in neutral
No objects in the area around the pedals
Do not drive in neutral or with the engine
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
stopped, as doing so disables engine braking.
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
In addition, steering and brake assist are un‐
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
available with the engine stopped.◀
impeded while driving and create the risk of an
accident.
Brake disc corrosion
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects. The corrosion on the brake discs and the con‐
tamination on the brake pads are furthered by:
Only use floor mats that have been approved
for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in ▷ Low mileage.
place. ▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐ used at all.
tened again after they were removed for clean‐ ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
ing, for example.◀ Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure
that must be exerted by the pads during brake
Driving in wet conditions applications to clean the discs is not reached.
When roads are wet coated with road salt or Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the
there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pres‐ brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐
sure on the brake pedal every few miles. fect that generally cannot be corrected.
169
Condensation under the parked

vehicle
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water develops that exits under‐
neath the vehicle.
Traces of water under the vehicle like this are
normal.
170
Loading Driving tips
Loading
Vehicle equipment ▷ The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed XXX kg
All standard, country-specific and optional or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the
equipment that is offered in the model series is vehicle and unstable driving situations
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ may result.
Hints
Overloading the vehicle
To avoid exceeding the approved carry‐
ing capacity of the tires, never overload the ve‐ 2. Determine the combined weight of the
hicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and driver and passengers that will be riding in
increases the rate at which damage develops your vehicle.
inside the tires. This could result in a sudden 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
loss of tire inflation pressure.◀ and passengers from XXX kilograms or
No fluids in the trunk YYY pounds.
Make sure that fluids do not leak into the 4. The resulting figure equals the available
trunk; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐ amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
aged.◀ pacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
Securing cargo 1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs
Always position and secure the cargo as passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
described above; otherwise, it can endanger available cargo and luggage load capacity
the car's occupants if sudden braking or is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =
swerving becomes necessary. 400 lbs.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried 5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐
loose inside the car; otherwise, they could be gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐
thrown around as a result of hard braking, sud‐ cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
den swerves, etc., and endanger the occu‐ available cargo and luggage load capacity
pants.◀ calculated in Step 4.
Determining the load limit

1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐
hicle’s placard:
171
Driving tips Loading
Load Securing cargo

Lashing eyes in the cargo area
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of

the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the To secure the cargo there are four lashing
less cargo that can be transported. eyes in the cargo area.
Floor net
Stowing cargo The floor net can also be used to Secure the
load and to store small parts.
▷ The cover of the high-voltage battery is lo‐
cated in the trunk. Do not remove the cover
to stow luggage.
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
the rear passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety Hook the floor net into the fittings in the cargo
belts in the opposite buckle. area floor.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow cargo.
Securing cargo
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of
▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐
the backrests.
taining straps or draw straps.
▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with
cargo straps.
Attach the cargo straps, retaining straps or
draw straps to the lashing eyes in the cargo
area.
172
Loading Driving tips
Securing cargo Therefore, note the following when loading

Always position and secure the cargo as and driving:
described above; otherwise, it can endanger ▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
the car's occupants if sudden braking or loads and the approved gross vehicle
swerving becomes necessary. weight.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried ▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
loose inside the car; otherwise, they could be ▷ The roof load should not be too large in
thrown around as a result of hard braking, sud‐ area.
den swerves, etc., and endanger the occu‐
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the
pants.◀
bottom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie
with ratchet straps.
Roof-mounted luggage rack
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
Note path of the trunk lid.
Roof racks are available as special accessories. ▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐
ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners
Securing gently.
Follow the installation instructions of the roof

rack.
Roof drip rail with flaps
The anchorage points are located in the roof

drip rail above the doors.
Fold the cover outward.
Loading
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center
of gravity when loaded, they have a major ef‐
fect on vehicle handling and steering re‐
sponse.
173
Driving tips Saving fuel
Saving fuel
Vehicle equipment Close the windows and glass
All standard, country-specific and optional sunroof
equipment that is offered in the model series is Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ open results in increased air resistance and
ment is also described that is not available in a thereby reduces the range.
Tires
General information
General information Tires can affect fuel consumption values in
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for various ways, for instance fuel consumption
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐ can be influenced by the size of the tires.
sions.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ Check the tire inflation pressure
ferent factors. regularly
The implementation of certain measures, driv‐ Check and, if necessary, correct the tire infla‐
ing style and regular maintenance can have an tion pressure at least twice a month and before
influence on fuel consumption and on the envi‐ starting on a long trip.
ronmental impact. Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Drive away immediately
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
Remove attached parts the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
following use
This is the fastest way for the cold engine to
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage reach its operating temperature.
racks which are no longer required following
use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐ Look well ahead when
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces
fuel consumption.
174
Saving fuel Driving tips
Braking longer will charge the high-voltage reduce the range, especially in city and stop-
battery more. and-go traffic.
Therefore, switch off these functions if they
are not actually needed.
Use coasting The ECO PRO driving program supports the
When approaching a red light, take your foot energy conserving use of comfort functions.
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to These functions are automatically deactivated
a halt. partially or completely.
On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the
accelerator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Have maintenance carried
out
Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
Switch off the engine during optimal vehicle economy and operating life.
longer stops The maintenance should be carried out by
your service center.
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
Also note the BMW Maintenance System, refer
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
to page 199.
congestion.
Auto Start/Stop function

The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle
ECO PRO
automatically switches off the engine during a
The concept
stop.
ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves
If the engine is switched off and then restarted
on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐
rather than leaving the engine running con‐
gine control and comfort functions, e. g. the
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are
climate control output, are adjusted.
reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐
onds of switching off the engine. eDRIVE electric driving, refer to page 68, and
the Coasting, refer to page 68, driving status
Using this system can cause certain compo‐
are becoming increasingly possible.
nents of the vehicle to become worn prema‐
turely. In addition, context-sensitive instructions can
be displayed that assist in driving in a manner
In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐
that optimizes fuel consumption.
mined by other factors, such as driving style,
road conditions, maintenance or environmental In the instrument display, the extension of the
factors. range achieved by this can be displayed as a
bonus range.
Switch off any functions that At a glance

The system includes the following
are not currently needed
EfficientDynamics functions and displays:
Functions such as seat heating and the rear ▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 176.
window defroster require a lot of energy and
175
▷ ECO PRO tips driving instruction, refer to cooling of the passenger compartment, fuel
page 177 consumption can be economized.
▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to The outputs of the seat heater and the exterior
page 176. mirror heating are also reduced.
The exterior mirror heating is made available
Activate ECO PRO when outside temperatures are very cold.
Press button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument ECO PRO potential
cluster. The percentage of potential savings that can
be achieved with the current configuration is
displayed.
Configuring ECO PRO
Via the Driving Dynamics Control Display in the instrument cluster

1. Activate ECO PRO.
ECO PRO bonus range
2. "Configure ECO PRO"
An extension of the range can
3. Configure the program. be achieved by an adjusted driv‐
ing style.
Via the iDrive
This may be displayed as the
1. "Settings" bonus range in the instrument
2. "ECO PRO mode" cluster.
Or The bonus range is shown in the range display.
1. "Settings" The bonus range is automatically reset every

time the vehicle is refueled.
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Configure ECO PRO"
Driving style
Configure the program.
ECO PRO Tip

▷ "Tip at:":
Set ECO Pro speed at which an ECO PRO
Tip is to be displayed.
▷ "ECO PRO speed warning":
A reminder is displayed if the set ECO PRO
speed is exceeded.
In the tachometer, a mark in the bar display in‐
ECO PRO climate control dicates the current efficiency of the driving
"ECO PRO climate control" style.
The climate control is adjusted to be fuel-effi‐ Mark in the CHARGE area, arrow 1: display for
cient. energy recovered by coasting or when braking.
By making a slight change to the set tempera‐ Mark in the POWER area, arrow 2: display
ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or when accelerating.
176
The efficiency of the driving style is shown by 3. "ECO PRO Tips"

the color of the bar: The setting is stored for the profile currently in
▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long use.
as the mark moves within the blue range.
▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by Coasting
backing off the accelerator pedal.
The concept
The display switches to blue as soon as all
conditions for fuel-economy-optimized driving The system helps to conserve fuel.
are met. To do this, under certain conditions the engine
is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐
sion when transmission position D is engaged.
ECO PRO Tip - driving instruction
The vehicle continues traveling with the engine
The arrow indicates that the idling to reduce fuel consumption. Transmis‐
driving style can be adjusted to sion position D remains engaged.
be more fuel efficient by backing This driving condition is referred to as coast‐
off the accelerator for instance. ing.
As soon as the brake or accelerator pedal is
ECO PRO tip - Symbols depressed, the engine is automatically coupled
to the transmission again.
An additional symbol and a text instruction are
displayed.
Hints
Symbol Measure Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO, re‐
fer to page 175, driving mode.
For efficient driving style, back off
the accelerator or delay accelerating Coasting is automatically activated when ECO
to allow time to assess road condi‐ PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics
tions. Control.
The function is available in a certain speed
Reduce speed to the selected ECO
range.
PRO speed.
A forward-looking driving style helps the driver
Automatic transmission: switch to use the function as often as possible and
from M/S to D and avoid manual supports the fuel-conserving effect of coast‐
shift interventions. ing.
Safety mode
Indications on the Control Display
The function is not available if one of the fol‐
lowing conditions is satisfied.
Displaying ECO PRO Tips
▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
ECO PRO Tips can be displayed as a note in
the split screen while driving in the energy flow ▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on
display. steep uphill or downhill grades.
Displaying ECO PRO Tips: ▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low
or vehicle electrical system drawing exces‐
1. "Vehicle Info" sive current.
2. "Hybrid" ▷ Cruise control activated.
177
Functional requirements Displaying EfficientDynamics info

In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in 1. "Vehicle Info"
a speed range from approximately 30 mph, ap‐ 2. "EfficientDynamics"
prox. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h, if
3. "EfficientDynamics info"
the following conditions are satisfied:
▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not Deactivating the system manually
operated.
The function can be deactivated in the Config‐
▷ The selector lever is in transmission posi‐ ure ECO PRO, refer to page 176, menu, e.g., to
tion D. use the braking effect of the engine when trav‐
▷ Engine and transmission are at operating eling downhill.
temperature. The setting is stored for the profile currently in
use.
Display
ECO PRO driving style analysis
Display in the instrument cluster
The mark in the bar display be‐ The concept
low the tachometer is backlit in The system helps in this situation to develop
blue and is located at the zero an especially efficient driving style and to con‐
point. The tachometer approxi‐ serve fuel.
mately indicates idle speed. For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.
The coasting point indicator is illuminated at The assessment is done in various categories
the zero point during coasting. and is displayed on the Control Display.
Using this indication, the individual driving
Indications on the Control Display style can be oriented toward conserving fuel.
The Coasting driving condition is displayed in The last fifteen minutes of a trip are evaluated.
EfficientDynamics Info while this driving mode The range of the vehicle can be extended by
is active. an efficient driving style.
The distance traveled in the Coasting driving This gain in range is displayed as a bonus
condition is indicated by a counter. range in the instrument cluster and on the
Control Display.
The function is only available in ECO PRO
mode.
Calling up ECO PRO driving style

analysis
Color code blue, arrow 1, and symbol, arrow 2: Via the Driving Dynamics Control
driving condition Coasting. 1. Activate ECO PRO.
2. "EfficientDynamics"
178
Display
The display of the ECO PRO driving style anal‐

ysis consists of a symbolized road route and a
lookup table.
The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driv‐
ing style. The more efficient the driving style,
the smoother the depicted road route be‐
comes, arrow 1.
The table of values contains stars. The more
efficient the driving style, the more stars are in‐
cluded in the table and the faster the bonus
range increases, arrow 2.
If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐
cient, a wavy road and a reduced number of
stars is displayed.
To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO
PRO tips are displayed during the drive.
Tips about the energy saving driving style,
Conserving fuel, refer to page 174.
179
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.

Mobility Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle equipment 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

Hints 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached

Refuel promptly to the fuel filler flap.
Refuel no later than at a range of

30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is
not ensured and damage may occur.◀
Do not refuel unless the engine is at a

standstill and the transmission is in posi‐
tion P/N
Do not refuel unless the engine is at a standstill
and the transmission is in position P/N, other‐
wise the buildup of pressure may cause the
fuel nozzle to shut off prematurely.◀ Closing
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
Fuel cap 2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Do not pinch the retaining strap
Opening
Do not pinch the retaining strap attached
1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be
flap.
closed properly and fuel vapors can escape.◀
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap

In the event of an electrical malfunction, for ex‐
ample.
182
Refueling Mobility
1. Open the cover on the right side trim. To

do this, reach behind the top part of the
trim and pull.
2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump

symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap.
Observe the following when

refueling
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Do not overfill the fuel tank
Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise
fuel may escape, causing harm to the environ‐
ment and damaging the vehicle.◀
Handling fuels
Obey safety regulations posted at the
gas station.◀
183
Mobility Fuel
Fuel
Vehicle equipment xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
equipment that is offered in the model series is Do not refuel with Ethanol above the
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ maximum Ethanol proportion
ment is also described that is not available in a Do not refuel with Ethanol above the maximum
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional Ethanol proportion, that is, refueling with fuel
equipment or country variant. This also applies that contains more than 10 % Ethanol, flex fuel
for safety-related functions and systems. or other alcohols; otherwise, damage to the
engine and fuel supply could result.◀
Fuel recommendation Gasoline quality

BMW recommends AKI 91.
Note
General fuel quality Minimum fuel grade
Even fuels that conform to the specifica‐ BMW recommends AKI 89.
tions can be of low quality. Switch gas stations Minimum fuel grade
or use fuel from brand name producers having
a higher octane level; otherwise, engine prob‐ Do not use any gasoline below the mini‐
lems, such as poor engine starting perform‐ mum fuel grade as this may impair engine per‐
ance, poorer handling characteristics or driving formance.◀
performance may occur.◀ If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
Gasoline when starting at high outside temperatures.
For the best fuel economy, the gasoline should This has no effect on the engine life.
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. Fuel quality
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ The use of poor-quality fuels may result
taining metal must not be used. in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐
Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with‐ tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐
out metallic additives. ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐
ronmental conditions such as high ambient
Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso‐ temperature and high altitude, may occur.
line with metallic additives, e. g. manganese or
iron, or permanent damage to the catalytic If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
converter and other components.◀ ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling. gine deposits, it is highly recommended to
Ethanol should satisfy the following quality purchase gasoline from BP or Top Tier retail‐
standards: ers.
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
184
Fuel Mobility
Failure to comply with these recommendations

may result in the need for unscheduled main‐
tenance.◀
185
Mobility Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires

Vehicle equipment than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours.
After correcting the tire inflation pressure:
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ▷ Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
ment is also described that is not available in a ▷ Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
equipment or country variant. This also applies Pressure specifications
for safety-related functions and systems. The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 187, contains all pressure specifications
for the specified tire sizes at the ambient tem‐
Tire inflation pressure perature. Pressure specifications apply to ap‐
proved tire sizes and recommended tire
Safety information brands. This information can be obtained from
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐ your service center.
sure influence the following: To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
▷ The service life of the tires. please note the following:
▷ Road safety. ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Driving comfort. ▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
Checking the pressure Tire inflation pressures up to

Tires have a natural, consistent loss of pres‐ 100 mph/160 km/h
sure. For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐ to page 187, and adjust as necessary.
sure, and correct it as needed: at least twice a
month and before a long trip. If you fail to ob‐
serve this precaution, you may be driving on
tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition
that may not only compromise your vehicle's
driving stability, but also lead to tire damage
and the risk of an accident.◀
Tires heat up during driving, and the tire infla‐

tion pressure increases along with the temper‐
ature of the tire. The tire inflation pressure
These pressure values can also be found on
specifications relate to cold tires or tires with
the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's
the ambient temperature.
door pillar.
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
186
Wheels and tires Mobility
Maximum permissible speed Tire inflation pressures at max.

Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other‐ speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
wise, tire damage and accidents may result.◀ Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
Tire inflation pressure values up to excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,
100 mph/160 km/h and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the
ActiveHybrid 3 relevant table on the following pages. Other‐
wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Tire inflation pressure values over
Specifications in 100 mph/160 km/h
bar/PSI with cold
tires ActiveHybrid 3
Without high-speed tuning feature
225/45 R 18 91 V 2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38 Tire size Pressure specifications

M+S A/S RSC in bar/PSI
225/45 R 18 91 Y Specifications in
RSC bar/PSI with cold
225/50 R 17 94 H tires
M+S RSC
225/45 R 18 95 V
225/45 R 18 91 V 2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46
M+S XL RSC
M+S A/S RSC
Front: 225/45 R 18 2.2 / 32 - 225/45 R 18 91 Y
91 Y RSC - 2.4 / 35 RSC
Rear: 255/40 R 18 225/50 R 17 94 H
95 Y RSC M+S RSC
Front: 225/40 R 19 2.4 / 35 - 225/45 R 18 95 V
89 Y RSC M+S XL RSC
- 2.6 / 38
Rear: 255/35 R 19 Front: 225/45 R 18 2.7 / 39 -
92 Y RSC 91 Y RSC - 2.8 / 41
Front: 225/35 R 20 2.6 / 38 - Rear: 255/40 R 18
90 Y XL RSC 95 Y RSC
- 3.0 / 44
Rear: 255/30 R 20 Front: 225/40 R 19 2.7 / 39 -
92 Y XL RSC 89 Y RSC - 3.0 / 44
Compact wheel Speed up to a max. of Rear: 255/35 R 19
50 mph / 80 km/h 92 Y RSC
T 135/80 R 17 102
M 4.2 / 60
187
Tire size Pressure specifications Tire identification marks

in bar/PSI
Tire size
Front: 225/35 R 20 2.9 /42 -
90 Y XL RSC 245/45 R 18 96 Y
- 3.4 / 49
Rear: 255/30 R 20 245: nominal width in mm
92 Y XL RSC 45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
Compact wheel Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h 18: rim diameter in inches
T 135/80 R 17 102
M 4.2 / 60 96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
With high-speed tuning feature
Speed letter
Tire size Pressure specifications
Q = up to 100 mph, 160 km/h
in bar/PSI
R = up to 106 mph, 170 km/h
Specifications in
S = up to 112 mph, 180 km/h
bar/PSI with cold
tires T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h
225/45 R 18 91 Y 2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46
RSC W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
225/50 R 17 94 H Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h

M+S RSC
Tire Identification Number
225/45 R 18 95 V
M+S XL RSC DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 1013
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
Front: 225/45 R 18 2.7 / 39 -
91 Y RSC xxx: tire size and tire design
- 2.8 / 41
Rear: 255/40 R 18 1013: tire age
95 Y RSC Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Front: 225/40 R 19 2.7 / 39 -
89 Y RSC - 3.0 / 44 Tire age
Rear: 255/35 R 19 DOT … 1013: the tire was manufactured in the
92 Y RSC 10th week 2013.
Front: 225/35 R 20 2.9 /42 -
90 Y XL RSC Recommendation
- 3.4 / 49
Rear: 255/30 R 20 Regardless of wear, replace tires at least every
92 Y XL RSC 6 years.
Compact wheel Speed up to a max. of

T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h
M 4.2 / 60
188
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Temperature

Quality grades can be found where applicable The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
and maximum section width. generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; heat when tested under controlled conditions
Temperature A on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
DOT Quality Grades terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
Treadwear
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
Traction AA A B C to a level of performance which all passenger
Temperature A B C car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
All passenger car tires must conform to Fed‐ Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band
eral Safety Requirements in addition to these A represent higher levels of performance on
grades. the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐
quired by law.
Treadwear Temperature grade for this tire
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
ernment test course. For example, a tire tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, in combination, can cause heat buildup and
times as well on the government course as a possible tire failure.
tire graded 100. The relative performance of If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀
tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart signifi‐
cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐ RSC – Run-flat tires
ing habits, service practices and differences in Run-flat tires, refer to page 192, are labeled
road characteristics and climate. with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the sidewall.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, M+S
are AA, A, B, and C. Winter and all-season tires with better cold
Those grades represent the tire's ability to weather performance than summer tires.
stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire Tire tread
marked C may have poor traction performance.
Summer tires
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
and does not include acceleration, cornering, 0.12 in/3 mm.
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.
189
Winter tires ▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐

Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than dency to pull to the left or right.
0.16 in/4 mm. Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over
Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are curbs, road damage, or similar things.
less suitable for winter operation. In case of tire damage
If there are indications of tire damage, re‐
Minimum tread depth duce your speed immediately and have the
wheels and tires checked right away; other‐
wise, there is the increased risk of an accident.
Drive carefully to the nearest service center.
Have the vehicle towed or transported there.
Otherwise, tire damage can become life threat‐
ening for vehicle occupants and also other
road users.◀
Repair of tire damage

Wear indicators are distributed around the For safety reasons, the manufacturer of
tire's circumference and have the legally re‐ your vehicle recommends that you do not have
quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm. damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐
placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐
They are marked on the side of the tire with sult.◀
TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.
Tire damage Changing wheels and tires

Mounting
General information
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign Information on mounting tires
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear. Have mounting and balancing performed
only by a service center.
Notes If this work is not carried out properly, there is
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, the danger of subsequent damage and related
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles safety hazards.◀
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur Wheel and tire combination
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐
You can ask the service center about the right
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be
wheel/tire combination and wheel rim versions
careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your
for the vehicle.
speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped
with low-profile tires. Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair
the function of a variety of systems such as
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐
ABS or DSC.
fects:
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
▷ Unusual vibrations during driving.
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
190
Following tire damage, have the original wheel Retreaded tires

and tire combination remounted on the vehicle The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
as soon as possible. ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Approved wheels and tires Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐ Possibly substantial variations in the de‐
mends that you use only wheels and tires that sign and age of the tire casing structures can
have been approved for your particular vehicle limit service life and have a negative impact on
model. road safety.◀
For example, despite having the same official
size ratings, variations can lead to body con‐ Winter tires
tact and with it, the risk of severe accidents.
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval‐ winter roads.
uate non-approved wheels and tires to deter‐
Although so-called all-season M+S tires do
mine if they are suited for use, and therefore
provide better winter traction than summer
cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehi‐
tires, they do not provide the same level of per‐
cle if they are mounted.◀
formance as winter tires.
Recommended tire brands Maximum speed of winter tires

If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then display a corresponding sign in the field
of vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire
specialist or from your service center.
Maximum speed for winter tires
Do not exceed the maximum speed for
the respective winter tires; otherwise, tire dam‐
age and accidents can occur.◀
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐
hicle recommends certain tire brands. These
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall. Run-flat tires
With proper use, these tires meet the highest If you are already using run-flat tires, for your
standards for safety and handling. own safety you should replace them only with
the same kind. No spare tire is available in the
case of a flat tire. Your service center will be
New tires glad to advise you.
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full Rotating wheels between axles
traction potential until after an initial breaking- The manufacturer of your vehicle advises
in period. against switching wheels between the front
Drive conservatively for the first and rear axles.
200 miles/300 km. This can impair the handling characteristics.
191
Storage Snow chains

Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Fine-link snow chains
Always protect tires against all contact with oil, Only certain types of fine-link snow chains
grease and fuels. have been tested by the manufacturer of the
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐ vehicle, classified as road-safe and approved.
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire. Information about the approved snow chains
are available from the service center.
Run-flat tires Use

Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
Label with the tires of the following size:
▷ 205/60 R 16.
▷ 225/55 R 16.
▷ 225/50 R 17.
▷ 225/45 R 18.
Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Make sure that the snow chains are always
sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed accord‐
ing to the chain manufacturer's instructions.
RSC label on the tire sidewall. Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
The wheels are composed of special rims and mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de‐ in incorrect readings.
gree. Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
remain drivable to a restricted degree in the in incorrect readings.
event of a pressure loss. When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control if necessary.
Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to
page 106.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
page 103.
when using snow chains.
Changing run-flat tires

For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire.
Your service center will be glad to advise you.
192
Engine compartment Mobility
Engine compartment
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Jump-starting, negative terminal 6 Oil filler neck

2 Vehicle identification number 7 Coolant reservoir
3 Washer fluid reservoir The coolant reservoir for 6-cylinder and
4 Jump-starting, positive terminal diesel engines is located on the opposite
side of the engine compartment.
5 Engine compartment fuse box
193
Mobility Engine compartment
Hood Indicator/warning lamps

When the hood is opened, a Check Control
Hints message is displayed.
Working in the engine compartment
Closing the hood
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without the
necessary professional technical training.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
only by a service center.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
Never reach into the engine compart‐ Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16
ment in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.
Never reach into the intermediate spaces or The hood must audibly engage on both sides.
gaps in the engine compartment. Otherwise,
there is risk of injury, e.g., from rotating or hot Hood open when driving
parts.◀ If you see any signs that the hood is not
completely closed while driving, pull over im‐
Fold down wiper arm mediately and close it securely.◀
Before opening the hood, ensure that the
wiper arms are against the windshield, or this Danger of pinching
may result in damage.◀ Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Opening the hood
1. Pull lever in the interior:
Engine is released, arrow 1.
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever

again:
Hood can be opened, arrow 2.
194
Engine oil Mobility
Engine oil
Vehicle equipment trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip
is displayed.
With frequent short-distance trips, regularly
perform a detailed measurement.
Displaying the oil level
equipment or country variant. This also applies 1. "Vehicle Info"
for safety-related functions and systems. 2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
General information Oil level display messages

The engine oil consumption is dependent on Different messages appear on the display de‐
the driving style and driving conditions. When pending on the oil level. Pay attention to these
a sporty driving style is used, the engine oil messages.
consumption, for example, is clearly higher. If the engine oil level is too low, within the next
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level 125 miles/200 km Add oil, refer to page 196.
after refueling. Engine oil level too low
The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil Add oil immediately; otherwise, an insuf‐
measurement. ficient amount of engine oil could result in en‐
The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐ gine damage.◀
uring principles.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
▷ Status display
Too much engine oil
▷ Detailed measurement
Have the vehicle checked immediately;
otherwise, surplus oil can lead to engine dam‐
Checking the oil level age.◀
electronically
Detailed measurement
Status display
The concept
The concept In the detailed measurement the oil level is
The oil level is monitored electronically during checked and displayed via a scale.
driving and shown on the Control Display. During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
If the oil level reaches the minimum level, a creased somewhat.
check control message is displayed.
General information
Requirements A detailed measurement is only possible with
A current measured value is available after ap‐ certain engines.
prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter
195
Mobility Engine oil
Requirements Adding oil

▷ Vehicle is on level road. Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km.
▷ Automatic transmission: selector lever in Otherwise, the engine may be damaged.◀
transmission position N or P and accelera‐
Do not add too much engine oil
tor pedal not depressed.
When too much engine oil is added, im‐
▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐
mediately have the vehicle checked, otherwise,
perature.
this may cause engine damage.◀
Performing a detailed measurement Protect children

In order to perform a detailed measurement of Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐
the engine oil level: dren and heed the warnings on the containers
1. "Vehicle Info" to prevent health risks.◀
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Measure engine oil level"
Oil types for refilling
4. "Start measurement"
The oil level is checked and displayed via a Hints
scale.
No oil additives
Duration: approx. 1 minute.
Oil additives may lead to engine dam‐
age.◀
Adding engine oil Viscosity grades for engine oils

When selecting an engine oil, ensure that
General information the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity
Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐ grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40,
cle before engine oil is added. and SAE 5W-30 or malfunctions or engine
damage may occur.◀
Filler neck
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of
the engine.
Some types of oils in some cases are not avail‐
able in all countries.
Approved oil types
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01.
Only replenish the maximum oil amount of BMW Longlife-01 FE.
1 US quart/liter if the signal is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Additional information about the approved
types of oils can be requested from the service
center.
196
Engine oil Mobility
Alternative oil types

If the approved engine oils are not available, up
to 1 US quart/liter of an oil with the following
specification can be added:
Gasoline engine
API SM or superior grade specification.
Engine oil change

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
having the engine oil changed by your service
center.
197
Mobility Coolant
Coolant
Vehicle equipment Symbol Meaning
All standard, country-specific and optional Maximum
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ Minimum
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional Filling
equipment or country variant. This also applies 1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the cap of the coolant reservoir
slightly counterclockwise to allow any ex‐
cess pressure to dissipate, and then open
Hints it.
Danger of burns from hot engine
Do not open the cooling system while
the engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant
may cause burns.◀
Suitable additives
Only use suitable additives; otherwise,
engine damage may occur. The additives are
harmful to your health.◀
Coolant consists of water and additives. 3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up
Not all commercially available additives are to the specified level; do not overfill.
suitable for the vehicle. Information about the 4. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
suitable additives are available from the service The arrows on the coolant reservoir and
center. the cap must point towards one another.
5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Coolant level
Checking Disposal
1. Let the engine cool.
Comply with the relevant environmen‐
2. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐ tal protection regulations when dispos‐
tween the minimum and maximum marks. ing of coolant and coolant additives.
The marks are on the side of the coolant
reservoir.
198
Maintenance Mobility
Maintenance
Vehicle equipment Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
ment is also described that is not available in a If this occurs, have a service center update the
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional time-dependent maintenance procedures,
equipment or country variant. This also applies such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary,
for safety-related functions and systems. changing the engine oil and the microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter.
BMW maintenance system

Service and Warranty
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides
Information Booklet for US
support in maintaining road safety and the op‐ models and Warranty and
erational reliability of the vehicle. Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐
Condition Based Service formation Booklet for US models and Warranty
CBS and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐ els for additional information on service re‐
count the driving conditions of your vehicle. quirements.
Based on this, Condition Based Service deter‐ Maintenance and repair should be performed
mines the maintenance requirements. by your service center. Make sure to have reg‐
The system makes it possible to adapt the ular maintenance procedures recorded in the
amount of maintenance you need to your user vehicle's Service and Warranty Information
profile. Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
Detailed information on service requirements,
els. These entries are proof of regular mainte‐
refer to page 84, can be displayed on the Con‐
nance.
trol Display.
Service data in the remote control

Socket for OBD Onboard
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control. Diagnosis
Your service center will read out this data and
suggest the right array of service procedures Note
for your vehicle. Socket for Onboard Diagnosis
Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐ The socket for onboard diagnostics may
mote control with which the vehicle was driven only be used by the service center or a work‐
most recently. shop that operates in accordance with the
specifications of the vehicle manufacturer with
199
Mobility Maintenance
correspondingly trained personnel and other

authorized persons. Otherwise, use may result
in operating problems for the vehicle.◀
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for

checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Canadian model: warning light indi‐
cates the engine symbol.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain
circumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
trol components, in particular the catalytic
converter.
200
Replacing components Mobility
Replacing components
Vehicle equipment 3. Squeeze the retainer spring, arrow 1, and
fold up the wiper blade, arrow 2.
Onboard vehicle tool kit

4. Remove the wiper blade forward from the
catch.
5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order
of removal until it locks in place.
6. Fold down the wipers.
Folding down wipers before opening the
hood
Before opening the hood, ensure that the
wiper arms with the wiper blades are against
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located in a the windshield to prevent damage.◀
storage compartment under the cargo floor
cover in the cargo area.
Lamp and bulb replacement

Wiper blade replacement Hints
Note Lamps and bulbs

Do not fold down the wipers without Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu‐
wiper blades tion to vehicle safety.
Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
have not been installed; this may damage the that you entrust corresponding procedures to
windshield.◀ the service center if you are unfamiliar with
them or they are not described here.
Replacing the wiper blades You can obtain a selection of replacement
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer bulbs at the service center.
to page 72, the wiper arms.
2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
201
Mobility Replacing components
Danger of burns Headlamp glass

Only change bulbs when they are cool; Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
otherwise, there is the danger of getting ternal lamps in cool or humid weather. When
burned.◀ driving with the light switched on, the conden‐
sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐
Working on the lighting system lamp glasses do not need to be changed.
When working on the lighting system, If the headlamps do not dim despite driving
you should always switch off the lights af‐ with the light switched on, increasing humidity
fected to prevent short circuits. forms, e. g. water droplets in the light, have the
To avoid possible injury or equipment damage service center check this.
when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions
provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀ Headlamp setting
The headlamp adjustments can be affected by
Do not perform work/bulb replacement
changing lamps and bulbs. Therefore after a
on xenon headlamps
change, have the headlamp setting checked
Have any work on the xenon lighting system, and corrected by Service.
including bulb replacement, performed only by
a service center. Due to the high voltage Front lamps, bulb replacement
present in the system, there is the danger of
fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀ Halogen headlamps
Do not touch the bulbs
Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare hands, as even minute amounts of
contamination will burn into the bulb's surface
and reduce its service life.
Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar,
or hold the bulb by its base.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

1 Parking lamps
Light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover
2 High beams/headlamp flasher
serve as the light source for controls, display
elements and other equipment. 3 Low beams
These light-emitting diodes, which are related 4 Turn signal
to conventional lasers, are officially designated 5 Daytime running lights
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers
Do not remove the covers, and never
stare into the unfiltered light for several hours;
otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.◀
202
Accessing the turn signals and low beams Low beams

Follow the general instructions on Lamps and 55-watt bulb, H7.
bulbs, refer to page 201.
1. Turn the cap counterclockwise and re‐
1. In the wheel house, loosen the two brack‐ move.
ets and remove the cover.
2. Tilt the bulb down and then up to loosen it

from the holder and remove.
Turn signal
21-watt bulb, PY21W
1. If necessary, pull the inside trim of the

wheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulb
holder counterclockwise and remove.
3. Pull the connector off the bulb.

4. Attach the connector to the new bulb.
5. First insert the bulb at the top with the
strap, arrow 1, and then press down firmly,
arrow 2. Make sure that the bulb snaps into
2. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn place.
counterclockwise and remove.
3. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐
verse order of removal.
4. Attach the cover to the wheel house.
6. Close the headlamp housing with the cap.

Make sure that the cap engages.
203
Accessing the daytime running lights, high High beams/headlamp flasher

beams/headlamp flasher and parking 55-watt bulb, H7.
lamps
1. Tilt the bulb down and then up to loosen it
Follow the general instructions on Lamps and
from the holder and remove.
1. Open the hood, refer to page 194.

2. Turn the cap counterclockwise and re‐
move.
2. Pull the connector off the bulb.

3. Attach the connector to the new bulb.
4. First insert the bulb at the top with the
strap, arrow 1, and then press down firmly,
arrow 2. Make sure that the bulb snaps into
Parking lamps
place.
6-watt bulb, H6W.
1. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and

remove.

2. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn

3. To insert the bulb and bulb holder, proceed
in reverse order of removal. Make sure that
the bulb holder snaps into place.
204
Daytime running lights Headlamps

24-watt bulb, PW24W.
1. If necessary, remove the high beam bulb

connector.
2. Remove the bulb holder.
1 Parking lamps / daytime running lights

2 Low beams/high beams/headlamp flasher
3 Turn signal
Low beams and high beams are designed with

3. Remove the bulb from the bulb holder. xenon technology.
4. To insert the new bulb, proceed in reverse The parking lamps and daylight running lights
order of removal. During insertion, the bot‐ are made using LED technology.
tom of the bulb holder must be facing
Contact your service center in the event of a
downward. Make sure that the bulb holder
malfunction.
snaps into place.
5. Attach the high beam bulb connector. Turn signal
6. Close the headlamp housing with the cap. Follow the general instructions on Lamps and
Make sure that the cap engages. bulbs, refer to page 201.
Xenon headlamps
Xenon headlamps
Because of the long life of these bulbs, the
likelihood of failure is very low. Switching the
lamps on and off frequently shortens their life.
If a bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps and
continue the trip with great care. Comply with
local regulations.
Do not perform work/bulb replacement
on xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system,
including bulb replacement, performed only by
a service center. Due to the high voltage
present in the system, there is the danger of
fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀
For checking and adjusting headlamp aim,

please contact your BMW center.
205
21-watt bulb, PY21W Carefully raise the wheel house panel, ar‐
row 2.
1. In the wheel house, loosen the two brack‐
ets and remove the cover.
2. Pull off the bulb connector, arrow 1.
2. If necessary, pull the inside trim of the Turn the bulb, arrow 2.
wheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulb Left side of vehicle: turn clockwise.
holder counterclockwise and remove. Right side of vehicle: turn counterclock‐
wise.
Remove the bulb.
3. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn

4. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐ 3. Insert the new bulb, connect the connector
verse order of removal. and screw on the wheel house panel.
Turn signal in exterior mirror
Front fog lamps Follow the general instructions on Lamps and
Follow the general instructions on Lamps and bulbs, refer to page 201.
bulbs, refer to page 201. The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature
35-watt bulb, H8. LED technology. Contact your service center
in the event of a malfunction.
1. Use the back side of the screwdriver from
the onboard vehicle tool kit to remove the
three wheel house panel screws, arrow 1.
206
Tail lamps, bulb replacement Removing the exterior tail lamp

1. Open trunk lid.
At a glance
2. Use the screwdriver from the onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit to loosen the screw, arrow 1,
and remove the cover, arrow 2.
1 Turn signal
2 Reversing lamp
3 Inside brake lamp 3. Use the screwdriver handle to loosen the
4 Tail lamps two nuts, arrows 1 and 2, and remove. The
tail lamp is still attached to a rubber mount
5 Outside brake lamp
on the outside.
Bulb replacement, exterior tail lamps
General information
Turn signal: 21-watt bulb, P21WLL.
Outer brake lamp: 21-watt bulb, H21W.
The tail lamps feature LED technology. Con‐
tact your service center in the event of a mal‐ 4. Grasp the inner edge of the tail lamp and
function. carefully swing it back and out of the rub‐
ber mount, arrow 1. Use your free hand to
Use caution when replacing the bulb hold it in place in order to prevent the tail
Use caution and proceed one step at a lamp from coming loose suddenly. Make
time when replacing the bulbs to prevent dam‐ sure that the foam rubber sealing ring is on
age to the tail lamps or vehicle.◀ the centering pin, arrow 2.
207
5. Remove the connecting line from the clip component, arrow 2. Make sure that the
on the bulb holder. tail lamp engages in the rubber mount.
6. Release the catch at the top on the con‐
nector of the connecting line and remove
the connector from the bulb holder.
Replacing the bulbs

1. Loosen the four fasteners, arrow 1, on the
bulb holder and remove the bulb holder
from the tail lamp, arrow 2.
4. Screw the tail lamp on with the two nuts.

5. Fit the cover in place and screw onto the
fastener. Make sure that the tubular seal is
not pinched.
Lamps in the trunk lid
General information
2. Press the defective bulb gently into the Follow the general instructions on Lamps and
socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. bulbs, refer to page 201.
3. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the Reversing lamps: 16-watt bulb, PW16W.
new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make Inner brake lamps: 21-watt bulb, H21W
sure that the bulb holder engages in all fas‐
teners. Accessing the lamps
1. Use the screwdriver from the onboard ve‐
Installing the tail lamp
hicle tool kit to loosen and completely re‐
1. Connect the connecting line to the tail move the six screws on the trim.
lamp and secure the bulb holder in the clip.
2. Make sure that the foam rubber sealing
ring is on the centering pin, arrow 2, and is
not damaged.
3. Position and firmly press the outer part of
the tail lamp onto the rubber mount, ar‐
row 1 and the inner part onto the centering
2. Carefully loosen the trim from the trunk lid,

starting at the edge and working toward
the area around the recessed grips. Make
sure that the trim does not become stuck.
3. Carefully swing out the trim.
208
Replacing the reversing lamp and inner These lamps are made using LED technology.
brake lamp Contact your service center in the event of a
1. Loosen the two holders, arrow 1 and pull malfunction.
down on the lamp holder to remove, ar‐
row 2.
Changing wheels
Hints
The vehicle equipment does not include a
spare tire.
When using run-flat tires or tire sealants, a tire
does not need to be changed immediately in
the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire.
The tools for changing wheels are available as
2. Unscrew the defective bulb from the accessories from your service center.
socket counterclockwise for reversing or
rear fog lamps. Jacking points for the vehicle jack
3. Insert the new bulb.
Installing the bulb holder

1. Slide the bulb holder onto the two guide
pins, arrow 1. Insert the two contacts, ar‐
row 2, into the connections, arrow 3.
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐

cated at the positions shown.
Position the vehicle jack only at the loca‐

tions shown
There are also hybrid components under the
vehicle that are hidden by the underbody pan‐
2. Press on the bulb holder. Make sure that
eling.
the two exterior holders latch into place.
Make sure not to damage any of the under‐
3. Swing the trim back onto the trunk lid and
body paneling parts.
secure.
Otherwise, there is the risk of fatal injury from
Tail lamp, license plate lamp and electric shock due to damaged high-voltage
central brake lamp components.◀
209
Vehicle battery Starting aid terminals

In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
Maintenance starting aid terminals, refer to page 214, in the
The battery is maintenance-free. The added engine compartment with the engine off.
amount of acid is sufficient for the service life
of the battery. Power failure
Your service center will be glad to advise you After a temporary power loss, some equipment
on questions regarding the battery. needs to be reinitialized.
Individual settings need to be reprogrammed:
Battery replacement ▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐
Use approved vehicle batteries only tions again.
Only use vehicle batteries that have been ▷ Time: update.
approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer; ▷ Date: update.
otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and
▷ Navigation system: wait for the operability
systems or functions may not be fully availa‐
of the navigation.
ble.◀
After a battery replacement, have the battery Disposing of old batteries

registered on the vehicle by your service cen‐ Have old batteries disposed of by your
ter to ensure that all comfort functions are fully service center or bring them to a recy‐
available and that any Check Control mes‐ cling center.
sages of these comfort functions are no longer
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
displayed.
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Charging the battery
Note
Do not plug chargers into the socket Fuses
Do not connect battery chargers to the
Hints
factory-installed sockets in the vehicle as this
may damage the battery.◀ Replacing fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
General information do not replace a defective fuse with a substi‐
Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐ tute of another color or amperage rating; this
ciently charged to guarantee that the battery could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re‐
remains usable for its full service life. sulting in a fire in the vehicle.◀
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐ Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse
lowing cases: types and locations are stored in the fuse box
▷ When making frequent short-distance in the cargo area.
drives.
▷ If the vehicle is not used for prolonged pe‐
riods, longer than a month.
210
In the engine compartment In the cargo area

1. Use the onboard vehicle tool kit to loosen
the three cover screws, arrow 1.
Raise the cargo floor panel.
2. Pull up the holder, arrow 2.

3. Remove the cover from one side, arrow 3.
4. Press the four fasteners and remove the
cover.
Information on the fuse types and locations is

found on a separate sheet.
Attaching the covers

1. When attaching the cover, make sure that
all four fasteners are engaged.
2. Attach the cover under the rubber lip and
then thread it between the bars.
3. Press down on the holder and tighten the

three screws.
211
Mobility Breakdown assistance
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle equipment Hints
All standard, country-specific and optional Emergency Request not guaranteed

equipment that is offered in the model series is For technical reasons, the Emergency
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor‐
ment is also described that is not available in a able conditions.◀
equipment or country variant. This also applies Initiating an Emergency Request
Hazard warning flashers
1. Press the cover briefly to open it.

2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
button lights up.
The button is located in the center console. ▷ The LED lights up: an Emergency Request
was initiated.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
until the voice connection has been estab‐
Intelligent Emergency lished.
Request ▷ The LED flashes when a connection to the
BMW Response Center has been estab‐
Requirements lished.
▷ The radio ready state is switched on. When the emergency request is received
▷ The Assist system is functional. at the BMW Response Center, the BMW
▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has Response Center contacts you and takes
been activated. further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
General information BMW Response Center can take further
Only press the SOS button in an emergency. steps to help you under certain circum‐
stances.
For this purpose, data that are used to de‐
termine the necessary rescue measures,
such as the current position of the vehicle
212
Breakdown assistance Mobility
if it can be established, are transmitted to Storage

the BMW Response Center.
▷ If the LED is flashing, but the BMW Re‐
sponse Center can no longer be heard via
the speaker, you can nevertheless still be
heard for the BMW Response Center.
Initiating an Emergency Request

automatically
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐
quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐ The first aid kit is located in a storage compart‐
ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐ ment under the cargo floor cover.
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS
button.
Roadside Assistance
Warning triangle
Service availability
Roadside Assistance can be reached around
the clock in many countries. You can obtain as‐
sistance there in the event of a vehicle break‐
down.
Roadside Assistance
The Roadside Assistance phone number can
be viewed on the iDrive or a connection to
Roadside Assistance can be established di‐
The warning triangle is located on the inside of
rectly.
the trunk lid.
For additional information, see user's manual
To remove, loosen the bracket.
for Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐
cation.
First aid kit

Jump-starting
Note
Some of the articles have a limited service life. Notes
Check the expiration dates of the contents If the battery is discharged, an engine can be
regularly and replace any expired items started using the battery of another vehicle
promptly. and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐
bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
213
Do not touch live parts

To avoid the risk of potentially fatal in‐
jury, always avoid all contact with electrical
components while the engine is running.◀
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This infor‐
mation can be found on the battery.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐ battery negative terminal.
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
Connecting the cables
consumers in both vehicles.
Be careful not to swap over the positive
Bodywork contact between vehicles and negative connector terminals
Make sure that there is no contact be‐ Do not swap over the positive and negative
tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other‐ terminals of the connectors, otherwise there is
wise, there is the danger of short circuits.◀ a danger that components of the hybrid sys‐
tem or the vehicle electronics may be irrepara‐
Starting aid terminals bly damaged.
Connecting order Take note of the label next to the positive ter‐
Connect the jumper cables in the correct minal.◀
order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury Before you begin, switch off all unnecessary
from sparking.◀ electronic systems/power consumers, such as
the radio, on the assisting and receiving vehi‐
cles.
1. Open the cover of the BMW starting aid

terminal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐
tance.
The so-called starting aid terminal in the en‐ 3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
gine compartment acts as the battery's posi‐ of the cable to the positive terminal of the
tive terminal. battery, or to the corresponding starting
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal. aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
214
the battery, or to the corresponding engine Automatic transmission: transporting

or body ground of assisting vehicle. your vehicle
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to the Note
corresponding engine or body ground of Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
the vehicle to be started. Therefore, contact a service center in the
event of a breakdown.
Starting the engine Do not have the vehicle towed
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
Have your vehicle transported on a load‐
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle ing platform only; otherwise, damage may oc‐
and let it run for several minutes at an in‐ cur.◀
creased idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle being Tow truck
started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not success‐
ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐
other attempt in order to allow the dis‐
charged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐
verse order.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
Do not lift the vehicle
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
Tow-starting and towing body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage
may result.◀
Note
Use the tow fitting screwed in at the front for
maneuvering the vehicle only.
When tow-starting and towing the vehi‐
cle, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems; Towing other vehicles
function of individual systems could result in General information
an accident.◀
Light towing vehicle
Switch off Intelligent Safety systems, refer to
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
page 106.
than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will
not be possible to control the vehicle re‐
sponse.◀
Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly

Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may
cause damage.◀
215
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐ partment under the cargo floor cover in the
pending on local regulations. cargo area.
▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly
identify the vehicle being towed by placing Tow fitting, information on use
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐ ▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with
dow. the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
Tow bar roads only.
The tow fittings used should be on the same ▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
side on both vehicles. do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe vehicle can occur.◀
the following:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited during Screw thread
cornering.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses
on the vehicle components when towing, al‐
ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps. Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to
Attaching the tow rope correctly push it out.
Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit‐
ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is Tow-starting
secured on other parts of the vehicle.◀
Automatic transmission
Tow fitting Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Due to the automatic transmission, the engine
cannot be started by tow-starting.
Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem‐
edied.
Safety of the hybrid system

Hybrid system work
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐ Your vehicle's hybrid system is a self-con‐
ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the tained system. Safety is ensured as long as no
front or rear of the BMW. It is in a storage com‐ work is performed on the technical compo‐
nents.
216
Thus, have work on the vehicle, for instance there is the risk of fatal injury from electrocu‐
retrofitting accessories, performed by the tion due to the system's high voltage.◀
service center or a workshop that works ac‐
cording to BMW specifications with appropri‐ Escaping fluids
ately trained personnel. Do not touch any fluids escaping from
the high-voltage battery, or the skin can sus‐
Maintenance and repairs
tain chemical burns.◀
Have maintenance and repair work per‐
formed only by a service center or a workshop If you are involved in an accident with your ve‐
that works according to BMW specifications hicle, compliance with the following additional
with appropriately trained personnel. Other‐ safety precautions is required with regard to
wise, there is the risk of fatal injury from elec‐ the high-voltage system:
trocution due to the high-voltage system's ▷ Secure the crash site.
high voltage.◀ ▷ Immediately notify rescue forces, police, or
firefighters of the fact that your vehicle is
Hybrid system: contact with water equipped with a high-voltage system.
The hybrid system is typically safe even in the ▷ Engage selector lever position P, apply the
following example situations: parking brake, and switch off the ignition or
▷ Water in the footwell, for instance after a deactivate drive readiness.
rainstorm when the glass sunroof is open. ▷ Lock the vehicle after exiting.
▷ Vehicle is in the water, such as in the event ▷ Do not inhale any gases escaping from the
of high water levels. high-voltage battery, if necessary keep a
▷ Liquid escapes in the trunk. distance to the vehicle.
In these cases there is no risk of injury from
electric shock. Other damages on the vehicle
are possible.
Hybrid system: automatic

deactivation
If an accident occurs, the hybrid system is
switched off automatically in order not to en‐
danger occupants and other road users.
Read the information on What to do after an
accident, refer to page 217.
What to do after an accident

General information
After an accident
After an accident, do not touch any high-
voltage components such as orange colored
high-voltage cables or parts that are in contact
with exposed high-voltage cables. Otherwise,
217
Mobility Care
Care
Vehicle equipment Intense soiling and road salt can damage
the vehicle.
equipment that is offered in the model series is Automatic car washes
ment is also described that is not available in a Hints
▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not
damaged by the transport mechanisms.
Car washes
▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they
Hints may be damaged, depending on the width
of the vehicle.
Steam jets or high-pressure washers
▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to
When using steam jets or high-pressure
page 71, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐
washers, hold them a sufficient distance away
vation.
and use a maximum temperature of
140 ℉/60 ℃. ▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm can
be triggered by the interior motion sensor
If the vehicle has a glass sunroof, ensure that a
of the alarm system. Follow the instruc‐
distance of at least 31.5 inches/80 cm is main‐
tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm,
tained. Holding them too close or using exces‐
refer to page 47.
sively high pressures or temperatures can
cause damage or preliminary damage that may Guide rails in car washes
then lead to long-term damage. Avoid car washes with guide rails higher
Follow the user's manual for the high-pressure than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body
washer.◀ could be damaged.◀
Cleaning sensors/cameras with high-

Before driving into a car wash
pressure washers
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a
When using high-pressure washers, do not
car wash, take the following steps:
spray the exterior sensors and cameras, e.g.,
Park Distance Control, for extended periods of Automatic transmission:
time and only from a distance of at least 1. Drive into the car wash.
12 in/30 cm.◀
2. Engage transmission position N.
▷ Regularly remove foreign items such as 3. Switch the engine off.
leaves in the area below the windshield
In this way, the ignition remains switched
when the hood is raised.
on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐
▷ Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly played.
in winter.
218
Care Mobility
Do not turn off the ignition in the car Vehicle care

wash
Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash; Car care products
otherwise, the transmission position P is BMW recommends using cleaning and care
engaged and damages can result.◀ products from BMW, since these have been
To switch on drive readiness: tested and approved.
Car care and cleaning products
1. Depress the brake pedal.
Follow the instructions on the container.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
When cleaning the interior, open the doors or
Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐
windows.
ping on the brake turns the ignition off.
Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐
The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside
cles.
when in transmission position N. A signal is
sounded when an attempt is made to lock the Cleansers can contain substances that are
vehicle. dangerous and harmful to your health.◀
Transmission position Vehicle paint

Transmission position P is engaged automati‐ Regular care contributes to driving safety and
cally: value retention. Environmental influences in
▷ When the ignition is switched off. areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
▷ After approx. 15 minutes.
fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
quency and extent of your car care to these
Headlamps
influences.
▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
Aggressive substances, such as spilled fuel,
caustic cleansers.
oil, grease or bird droppings, must be removed
▷ Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due immediately to prevent the finish from being
to insects, with shampoo and wash off with altered or discolored.
water.
▷ Thaw ice with deicing spray; do not use an Leather care
ice scraper. Remove dust from the leather often, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
After washing the vehicle
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action wear and premature degradation of the leather
can be reduced and corrosion of the brake surface.
discs can occur.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
Completely remove all residues on the win‐ clothing, provide leather care roughly every
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to two months.
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
wiper blade wear.
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible.
219
Mobility Care
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any
grease will gradually break down the protective silicon-containing car care products in order to
layer of the leather surface. avoid damage or reduced noise damping.
Suitable care products are available from the
service center. Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
Upholstery material care nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner. soft cloth.
If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use

Plastic components
a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suita‐
ble interior cleaner. These include:
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using ▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ▷ Headliner.
material vigorously. ▷ Lamp lenses.
Damage from Velcro® fasteners ▷ Instrument cluster cover.
Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or ▷ Matte black spray-coated components.
other articles of clothing can damage the seat ▷ Painted parts in the interior.
covers. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are
closed.◀ Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Lightly dampen the cloth with water.
Caring for special components Do not soak the headliner.
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol
Light-alloy wheels or solvents
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐ to surface damage.◀
turer's instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
Safety belts
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent
components, such as the brake disk. Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Chrome surfaces Chemical cleaning
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐ Do not clean chemically; this can destroy
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply the webbing.◀
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
ularly when they have been exposed to road Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
salt. belts clipped into their buckles.
Do not allow the reels to retract the safety
Rubber components belts until they are dry.
Aside from water, treat only with rubber
cleansers.
220
Care Mobility
Carpets and floor mats Long-term vehicle storage

No objects in the area around the pedals For idle phases that last several weeks, park
the vehicle with a fully charged battery if possi‐
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
ble. Your service center can advise you on
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
what to consider when storing the vehicle for
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
longer than six weeks.
impeded while driving and create the risk of an
accident. Do not allow the vehicle to sit idle for ex‐
Do not place additional floor mats over existing tended periods with a low charging state
mats or other objects. Before storing the vehicle for an extended pe‐
Only use floor mats that have been approved riod, check the battery charge indicator to en‐
for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in sure that the high-voltage battery is fully
place. charged. If necessary, charge the high-voltage
battery by driving the vehicle. Check the
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐
charge level regularly, and if necessary re‐
tened again after they were removed for clean‐
charge the high-voltage battery by driving the
ing, for example.◀
vehicle. Allowing the high-voltage battery
Floor mats can be removed from the passen‐ charge to drop too low will damage the bat‐
ger compartment for cleaning. tery.◀
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. Note
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and Follow the instructions for discharging the
forth in the direction of travel only. high-voltage battery, refer to page 167.
Sensors/cameras
To clean sensors and cameras, use a cloth
moistened with a small amount of glass
cleaner.
Displays/screens
Clean the displays with an antistatic microfiber
cloth.
Cleaning displays
Do not use chemical or household
cleansers.
Keep all fluids and moisture away from the
unit.
Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa‐
ces or electrical components.
Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do
not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage
can result.◀
221
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.

Reference Technical data
Technical data
Dimensions
BMW ActiveHybrid 3
Width with mirrors inches/mm 79.9/2,031
Width without mirrors inches/mm 71.3/1,811
Height with roof antenna inches/mm 56.7/1,441
Height without roof antenna inches/mm 56.3/1,429
Length inches/mm 182.1/4,627
Wheel base inches/mm 110.6/2,810
Smallest turning circle diam. ft/m 37.1/11.3
Weights
ActiveHybrid 3
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4,815

kg 2,184
Load lbs/kg 900/408
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,250/1,021
Approved rear axle load lbs 2,710

kg 1,229
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165.4/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 13.77/390
224
Technical data Reference
Capacities
US gal/liters Notes
Fuel tank 15/57 Fuel quality, refer to

page 184
225
Reference Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A All around the headliner 17 Automatic engine start-stop
All around the steering function 67
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐ wheel 14 Automatic headlamp con‐
tem 118 All-season tires, refer to Win‐ trol 94
ACC, Active Cruise Control ter tires 191 Automatic locking 45
with Stop & Go 123 Alternating-code hand-held Automatic recirculated-air
Acceleration Assistant, refer transmitter 153 control 147
to Launch Control 76 Alternative oil types 197 Automatic transmission with
Activated-charcoal filter 148 Antifreeze, washer fluid 73 Steptronic 73
Activate drive readiness 66 Antilock Brake System, AUTO program, automatic cli‐
Active Blind Spot Detec‐ ABS 118 mate control 147
tion 116 Anti-slip control, refer to AUTO program, intensity 147
Active Cruise Control with DSC 118 Auxiliary air conditioning 150
Stop & Go, ACC 123 Approved axle load 224 Average fuel consumption 88
ActiveHybrid, system 31 Approved engine oils 196 Average speed 88
Adapting to the course of the Arrival time 88 Axle loads, weights 224
road, hybrid system 84 Ash tray 156
Adaptive brake lights, refer to Assistance for the combus‐ B
Brake force display 117 tion engine, ASSIST 69
Adaptive Light Control 94 Assistance for the combus‐ Backrest curvature, refer to
Additives, oil 196 tion engine, eBOOST 69 Lumbar support 53
Adjustments, seats/head re‐ Assistance, Roadside Assis‐ Backrest, width 53
straints 51 tance 213 Band-aids, refer to First aid
After washing vehicle 219 Assistance when driving kit 213
Airbags 98 off 121 Bar for tow-starting/
Airbags, indicator/warning ASSIST, assistance for the towing 216
light 99 combustion engine 69 Battery replacement, vehicle
Air circulation, refer to Recir‐ Assist system information, on battery 210
culated-air mode 147 Control Display 91 Battery replacement, vehicle
Air, dehumidifying, refer to AUTO intensity 147 remote control 36
Cooling function 147 Automatic car wash 218 Battery, vehicle 210
Air distribution, manual 148 Automatic climate control Belts, safety belts 54
Air flow, automatic climate with enhanced features 146 Beverage holder, cu‐
control 148 Automatic Cruise Control pholder 162
Air pressure, tires 186 with Stop & Go 123 Blinds, sun protection 49
Air vents, refer to Ventila‐ Automatic Curb Monitor 59 BMW ActiveHybrid 31
tion 149 Automatic deactivation, front BMW Assist, see user's
Alarm system 46 passenger airbags 100 manual for Navigation, En‐
Alarm, unintentional 47 Automatic deactivation of the tertainment and Communi‐
All around the center con‐ hybrid system 217 cation
sole 16 BMW Homepage 6
226
Everything from A to Z Reference
BMW Internet page 6 Care, vehicle 219 Child restraint fixing system
BMW maintenance sys‐ Cargo 171 LATCH 62
tem 199 Cargo area, enlarging 158 Child restraint fixing systems,
Bonus range, ECO PRO 176 Cargo area lid 42 mounting 61
Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐ Cargo area, storage compart‐ Child safety locks 64
pholder 162 ments 163 Child seat, mounting 61
Brake assistant 118 Cargo, securing 172 Child seats 61
Brake discs, breaking in 166 Cargo straps, securing Chrome parts, care 220
Brake force display 117 cargo 172 Cigarette lighter 156
Brake lamps, brake force dis‐ Car key, refer to Remote con‐ Cleaning, displays 221
play 117 trol 36 Climate control 146
Brake lights, adaptive 117 Carpet, care 221 Clock 81
Brake pads, breaking in 166 Car wash 218 Closing/opening from in‐
Braking, hints 169 Catalytic converter, refer to side 42
Breakdown assis‐ Hot exhaust system 168 Closing/opening via door
tance 212, 213 CBS Condition Based Serv‐ lock 41
Breaking in 166 ice 199 Closing/opening with remote
Brightness of Control Dis‐ CD/Multimedia, see user's control 40
play 90 manual for Navigation, En‐ Clothes hooks 162
Bulb replacement 201 tertainment and Communi‐ Coasting 68
Bulb replacement, front 202 cation Cockpit 14
Bulb replacement, halogen Center armrest 161 Collision warning with braking
headlamps 202 Center console 16 function 110
Bulb replacement, rear 207 Center-Lock, see button for Collision warning with City
Bulb replacement, xenon central locking 39 Braking function 107
headlamps 205 Central locking system 39 Combination switch, refer to
Bulbs and lamps 201 Central screen, refer to Con‐ Turn signals 70
Button, RES 126 trol Display 18 Combination switch, refer to
Button, Start/Stop 65 Changes, technical, refer to Wiper system 71
Bypassing, refer to Jump- Safety 7 Combustion engine, start‐
starting 213 Changing parts 201 ing 66
Changing wheels 209 Comfort Access 43
C Changing wheels/tires 190 COMFORT program, Dy‐
CHARGE, energy recov‐ namic Driving Control 121
California Proposition 65 ery 69 Compartments in the
Warning 8 Charge indicator, high-volt‐ doors 161
Camera, care 221 age battery 82 Compass 154
Camera, rearview cam‐ Check Control 78 Computer 87
era 135 Checking the oil level elec‐ Condensation on win‐
Camera, Side View 138 tronically 195 dows 148
Camera, Top View 139 Children, seating position 61 Condensation under the vehi‐
Can holder, refer to Cu‐ Children, transporting cle 170
pholder 162 safely 61 Condition Based Service
Car battery 210 Child restraint fixing sys‐ CBS 199
Car care products 219 tem 61 Confirmation signal 45
Care, displays 221
227
ConnectedDrive, see user's Dimmable interior rearview DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
manual for Navigation, En‐ mirror 60 trol 118
tertainment and Communi‐ Direction indicator, refer to DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
cation Turn signals 70 trol 119
ConnectedDrive Services Display, electronic, instru‐ Dynamic Damping Con‐
Connecting electrical devi‐ ment cluster 78 trol 119
ces 156 Display in windshield 91 Dynamic Stability Control
Contact with water, hybrid Display lighting, refer to In‐ DSC 118
system 217 strument lighting 96 Dynamic Traction Control
Control Display 18 Displays 77 DTC 119
Control Display, settings 89 Displays, cleaning 221
Controller 18, 19 Displays, hybrid system 82 E
Control systems, driving sta‐ Disposal, coolant 198
bility 118 Disposal, vehicle battery 210 eBOOST, assistance for the
Convenient opening 40 Distance control, refer to combustion engine 69
Coolant 198 PDC 132 ECO PRO 175
Coolant temperature 81 Distance to destination 88 ECO PRO, bonus range 176
Cooling function 147 Divided screen view, split ECO PRO display 175
Cooling, maximum 147 screen 24 ECO PRO driving mode 175
Cooling system 198 Door lock, refer to Remote ECO PRO driving style analy‐
Corrosion on brake discs 169 control 36 sis 178
Cruise control 130 DRIVE, Driving with combus‐ ECO PRO mode 175
Cruise control, active with tion engine 69 ECO PRO Tip - driving in‐
Stop & Go 123 Drive-off assistant 121 struction 177
Cruising range 81 Drive-off assistant, refer to eDRIVE, electric driving 68
Cupholder 162 DSC 118 Electric drive readiness, Si‐
Current fuel consumption 84 Driver assistance, see Intelli‐ lent Start 66
gent Safety 106 Electric driving, eDRIVE 68
D Drive readiness in detail 66 Electronic displays, instru‐
Drive readiness states 65 ment cluster 78
Damage, tires 190 Driving Assistant, see Intelli‐ Electronic Stability Program
Damping control, dy‐ gent Safety 106 ESP, refer to DSC 118
namic 119 Driving Dynamics Con‐ Emergency detection, remote
Data, technical 224 trol 120 control 37
Date 81 Driving instructions, breaking Emergency release, door
Daytime running lights 94 in 166 lock 42
Deactivating drive readi‐ Driving instructions, hybrid Emergency release, fuel filler
ness 67 system 166 flap 182
Defrosting, refer to Windows, Driving mode 120 Emergency Request 212
defrosting 148 Driving notes, general 168 Emergency service, refer to
Dehumidifying, air 147 Driving stability control sys‐ Roadside Assistance 213
Destination distance 88 tems 118 Emergency start function, en‐
Digital clock 81 Driving style analysis 178 gine start 37
Digital compass 154 Driving tips 168 Emergency unlocking, trunk
Dimensions 224 Driving with combustion en‐ lid 43
Dimmable exterior mirrors 59 gine, DRIVE 69
228
Energy recovery, Fault displays, refer to Check G

CHARGE 69 Control 78
Engine, automatic off 67 Filler neck for engine oil 196 Garage door opener, refer to
Engine compartment 193 Fine wood, care 220 Universal garage door
Engine compartment, work‐ First aid kit 213 opener 152
ing in 194 Fitting for towing, refer to Gasoline 184
Engine coolant 198 Tow fitting 216 Gasoline quality 184
Engine oil 195 Flat tire, changing Gear change, automatic
Engine oil, adding 196 wheels 209 transmission 74
Engine oil additives 196 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 104 Gear shift indicator 85
Engine oil change 197 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐ General driving notes 168
Engine oil filler neck 196 tor TPM 101 Glass sunroof, powered 49
Engine oil temperature 80 Flat tire, warning Glove compartment 160
Engine oil types, alterna‐ lamp 102, 105 Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
tive 197 Flooding 168 proved 224
Engine oil types, ap‐ Floor carpet, care 221
proved 196 Floor mats, care 221 H
Engine start during malfunc‐ Fold down the rear seat back‐
tion 37 rest, see Though-loading Handbrake, refer to parking
Engine start, jump-start‐ system 158 brake 69
ing 213 Fold-out position, windshield Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
Engine temperature 80 wipers 72 nating code 153
Entering a car wash 218 Foot brake 169 Hazard warning flashers 212
Equipment, interior 152 Front airbags 98 Head airbags 98
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐ Front fog lamps 96 Headlamp control, auto‐
gram, refer to DSC 118 Front fog lamps, front, bulb matic 94
Exchanging wheels/tires 190 replacement 206 Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
Exhaust system 168 Front lamps 202 ture 93
Exterior mirror, automatic Front passenger airbags, au‐ Headlamp flasher 70
dimming feature 59 tomatic deactivation 100 Headlamp glass 202
Exterior mirrors 58 Front passenger airbags, indi‐ Headlamps 202
External start 213 cator lamp 100 Headlamps, care 219
External temperature dis‐ FTM Flat Tire Monitor 104 Headlamp washer system 71
play 81 Fuel 184 Headliner 17
External temperature warn‐ Fuel cap 182 Head restraints 51
ing 81 Fuel consumption, refer to Head restraints, front 55
Eyes for securing cargo 172 Average fuel consump‐ Head restraints, rear 56
tion 88 Head-up Display 91
F Fuel filler flap 182 Head-up Display, care 221
Fuel gauge 80 Heavy cargo, stowing 172
Failure message, refer to Fuel quality 184 High-beam Assistant 95
Check Control 78 Fuel recommendation 184 High beams 70
False alarm, refer to Uninten‐ Fuel, tank capacity 225 High beams/low beams, refer
tional alarm 47 Functions, hybrid system 31 to High-beam Assistant 95
Fan, refer to Air flow 148 Fuse 210 High-voltage battery, charge
indicator 82
229
High-voltage battery, dis‐ Inflation pressure, tires 186 Keyless Go, refer to Comfort
charge 167 Inflation pressure warning Access 43
Hills 169 FTM, tires 104 Key Memory, refer to Per‐
Hill start assistant, refer to Info display, refer to Com‐ sonal Profile 37
Drive-off assistant 121 puter 87 Kickdown, automatic trans‐
Hints 6 Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐ mission 74
Holder for beverages 162 tor TPM 102 Knee airbag 98
Homepage 6 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
Hood 194 FTM 105 L
Horn 14 Instrument cluster 77
Hotel function, trunk lid 43 Instrument cluster, electronic Lamp replacement 201
Hot exhaust system 168 displays 78 Lamp replacement, front 202
HUD Head-up Display 91 Instrument lighting 96 Lamp replacement, rear 207
Hybrid system, adapting to Integrated key 36 Lamps 93
the course of the road 84 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ Lamps and bulbs 201
Hybrid system, at a glance 31 quest 212 Lane departure warning 114
Hybrid system, automatic de‐ Intelligent Safety 106 Lane margin, warning 114
activation 217 Intensity, AUTO pro‐ Language on Control Dis‐
Hybrid system, contact with gram 147 play 90
water 217 Interior equipment 152 Lashing eyes, securing
Hybrid system, displays 82 Interior lamps 96 cargo 172
Hybrid system, safety 216 Interior lamps via remote con‐ LATCH child restraint fixing
Hydroplaning 168 trol 40 system 62
Interior motion sensor 47 Launch Control 76
I Interior rearview mirror, auto‐ Leather, care 219
matic dimming feature 60 LEDs, light-emitting di‐
Ice warning, refer to External Interior rearview mirror, com‐ odes 202
temperature warning 81 pass 154 Letters and numbers, enter‐
Icy roads, refer to External Interior rearview mirror, man‐ ing 25
temperature warning 81 ually dimmable 60 Light alloy wheels, care 220
Identification marks, tires 188 Internet page 6 Light control 94
Identification number, refer to Interval display, service re‐ Light-emitting diodes,
Important features in the en‐ quirements 84 LEDs 202
gine compartment 193 Lighter 156
iDrive 18 J Lighting 93
Ignition key, refer to Remote Lighting via remote con‐
control 36 Jacking points for the vehicle trol 40
Ignition off 65 jack 209 Light switch 93
Ignition on 65 Joystick, automatic transmis‐ Load 172
Indication of a flat sion 74 Loading 171
tire 102, 105 Jump-starting 213 Lock, door 41
Indicator and warning Locking/unlocking from in‐
lamps 78 K side 42
Individual air distribution 148 Locking/unlocking via door
Individual settings, refer to Key/remote control 36 lock 41
Personal Profile 37
230
Locking/unlocking with re‐ Marking on approved New wheels and tires 190
mote control 40 tires 191 No Passing Information 85
Locking, automatic 45 Marking, run-flat tires 192 Nylon rope for tow-starting/
Locking, central 39 Master key, refer to Remote towing 216
Locking, settings 45 control 36
Lock, power window 48 Maximum cooling 147 O
Locks, doors, and win‐ Maximum speed, display 85
dows 64 Maximum speed, winter OBD Onboard Diagnosis 199
Low beams 93 tires 191 OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐
Low beams, automatic, refer Measure, units of 90 agnosis 199
to High-beam Assistant 95 Medical kit 213 Obstacle marking, rearview
Lower back support 53 Memory, seat, mirror 57 camera 136
Luggage rack, refer to Roof- Menu in instrument clus‐ Octane rating, refer to Gaso‐
mounted luggage rack 173 ter 87 line quality 184
Lumbar support 53 Menus, operating, iDrive 18 Odometer 81
Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐ Office, see user's manual for
M ing concept 20 Navigation, Entertainment
Messages, refer to Check and Communication
Maintenance 199 Control 78 Officially use hybrid sys‐
Maintenance require‐ Microfilter 148 tem 166
ments 199 Minimum tread, tires 190 Oil 195
Maintenance, service require‐ Mirror 58 Oil, adding 196
ments 84 Mirror memory 57 Oil additives 196
Maintenance system, Mobile communication devi‐ Oil change 197
BMW 199 ces in the vehicle 168 Oil change interval, service
Malfunction displays, refer to Modifications, technical, refer requirements 84
Check Control 78 to Safety 7 Oil filler neck 196
Manual air distribution 148 Moisture in headlamp 202 Oil types, alternative 197
Manual air flow 148 Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐ Oil types, approved 196
Manual mode, transmis‐ play 18 Old batteries, disposal 210
sion 74 Mounting of child restraint fix‐ Onboard monitor, refer to
Manual operation, door ing systems 61 Control Display 18
lock 42 Multifunction steering wheel, Onboard vehicle tool kit 201
Manual operation, exterior buttons 14 Opening and closing 36
mirrors 59 Opening and closing, from in‐
Manual operation, fuel filler N side 42
flap 182 Opening and closing via door
Manual operation, Park Dis‐ Navigation, see user's manual lock 41
tance Control PDC 133 for Navigation, Entertain‐ Opening and closing, with re‐
Manual operation, rearview ment and Communication mote control 40
camera 135 Neck restraints, front, refer to Opening the trunk lid with no-
Manual operation, Side Head restraints 55 touch activation 44
View 138 Neck restraints, rear, refer to Operating concept, iDrive 18
Manual operation, Top Head restraints 56 Optional equipment, standard
View 139 Neutral cleaner, see wheel equipment 6
cleaner 220
231
Outside air, refer to Auto‐ Protective function, win‐ Roadside parking lamps 94
matic recirculated-air con‐ dows 48 Roller sunblinds 49
trol 147 Push-and-turn switch, refer to RON gasoline quality 184
Overheating of engine, refer Controller 18, 19 Roof load capacity 224
to Coolant temperature 81 Roof-mounted luggage
R rack 173
P Rope for tow-starting/
Radiator fluid 198 towing 216
Paint, vehicle 219 Radio-operated key, refer to RSC Run Flat System Com‐
Parallel parking assistant 140 Remote control 36 ponent, refer to Run-flat
Park Distance Control Radio ready state 65 tires 192
PDC 132 Radio, see user's manual for Rubber components,
Parked-car ventilation 149 Navigation, Entertainment care 220
Parked vehicle, condensa‐ and Communication Run-flat tires 192
tion 170 Rain sensor 71
Parking aid, refer to PDC 132 Rear lamps 207 S
Parking assistant 140 Rear socket 157
Parking brake 69 Rearview camera 135 Safe braking 169
Parking lamps 93 Rearview mirror 58 Safety 7
Passenger side mirror, tilting Rear window defroster 148 Safety belt reminder for driv‐
downward 59 Recirculated-air filter 148 er's seat and front passen‐
Pathway lines, rearview cam‐ Recirculated-air mode 147 ger seat 55
era 136 Recommended tire Safety belts 54
PDC Park Distance Con‐ brands 191 Safety belts, care 220
trol 132 Refueling 182 Safety of the hybrid sys‐
Pedestrian warning with city Remaining range 81 tem 216
braking function 112 Remote control/key 36 Safety switch, windows 48
Personal Profile 37 Remote control, auxiliary air Safety systems, airbags 98
Pinch protection system, conditioning, key 150 Saving fuel 174
glass sunroof 50 Remote control, malfunc‐ Screen, refer to Control Dis‐
Pinch protection system, win‐ tion 41 play 18
dows 48 Remote control, univer‐ Screwdriver 201
Plastic, care 220 sal 152 Screw thread for tow fit‐
Power failure 210 Replacement fuse 210 ting 216
Power sunroof, glass 49 Replacing parts 201 Seat and mirror memory 57
Power windows 47 Replacing wheels/tires 190 Seat belts, refer to Safety
Pressure, tire air pres‐ Reporting safety defects 10 belts 54
sure 186 RES button 126 Seat heating, front 54
Pressure warning FTM, Reserve warning, refer to Seat heating, rear 54
tires 104 Range 81 Seating position for chil‐
Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐ Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor dren 61
file 37 TPM 102 Seats 51
Programmable memory but‐ Residual cooling 150 Selection list in instrument
tons, iDrive 24 Retaining straps, securing cluster 87
Protective function, glass cargo 172 Selector lever, automatic
sunroof 50 Retreaded tires 191 transmission 74
232
Sensors, care 221 SPORT+ - program, Dynamic Tailgate opening with no-
Service and warranty 8 Driving Control 120 touch activation 44
Service requirements, Condi‐ Sport automatic transmis‐ Tailgate via remote con‐
tion Based Service sion 75 trol 40
CBS 199 Sport displays, torque dis‐ Tail lamps 207
Service requirements, dis‐ play, performance dis‐ Technical changes, refer to
play 84 play 89 Safety 7
Service, Roadside Assis‐ SPORT program, Dynamic Technical data 224
tance 213 Driving Control 120 Telephone, see user's manual
Services, ConnectedDrive Sport program, transmis‐ for Navigation, Entertain‐
Settings, locking/unlock‐ sion 74 ment and Communication
ing 45 Sport steering, variable 119 Temperature, automatic cli‐
Settings on Control Dis‐ Stability control systems 118 mate control 147
play 89 Start/Stop button 65 Temperature display, external
Settings, storing for seat, mir‐ Start function during malfunc‐ temperature 81
ror 57 tion 37 Temperature, engine oil 80
Shifting, automatic transmis‐ Starting the combustion en‐ Tempomat, refer to Active
sion 73 gine 66 Cruise Control 123
Shift paddles on steering Status display, tires 101 Terminal, starting aid 214
wheel 75 Status information, iDrive 23 Text message, supplemen‐
Side airbags 98 Status of Owner's Manual 7 tary 79
Side View 137 Steering wheel, adjusting 60 Theft alarm system, refer to
Signaling, horn 14 Steering wheel heating 60 Alarm system 46
Signals when unlocking 45 Steptronic, automatic trans‐ Theft protection, refer to
Silent Start, electric drive mission 73 Central locking system 39
readiness 66 Storage compartments 160 Thigh support 53
Sitting safely 51 Storage compartments, loca‐ Through-loading system 158
Size 224 tions 160 Tilt alarm sensor 47
Slide/tilt glass roof 49 Storage, tires 192 Time of arrival 88
Snow chains 192 Storing the vehicle 221 Tire damage 190
Socket 156 Summer tires, tread 189 Tire identification marks 188
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐ Supplementary text mes‐ Tire inflation pressure 186
nostics 199 sage 79 Tire inflation pressure moni‐
SOS button 212 Surround View 134 tor, refer to FTM 104
Spare fuse 210 Switch for Dynamic Driv‐ Tire Pressure Monitor
Specified engine oil ing 120 TPM 101
types 196 Switch-on times, parked-car Tires, changing 190
Speed, average 88 ventilation 150 Tires, everything on wheels
Speed limit detection, on‐ Switch, refer to Cockpit 14 and tires 186
board computer 88 Symbols 6 Tires, run-flat tires 192
Speed limiter, display 85 Symbols in the status field 23 Tire tread 189
Speed Limit Information 85 Tone, see user's manual for
Speed limit in the com‐ T Navigation, Entertainment
puter 88 and Communication
Split screen 24 Tachometer 80 Tools 201
Tailgate 42 Top View 138
233
Total vehicle weight 224 Updates made after the edito‐ Wheels, changing 190
Touchpad 21 rial deadline 7 Wheels, everything on wheels
Tow fitting 216 Upholstery care 220 and tires 186
Towing 215 USB interface 157 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
Tow-starting 215 FTM 104
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐ V Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 101 tor TPM 101
Traction control 119 Variable sport steering 119 Window defroster, rear 148
TRACTION program, Dy‐ Vehicle battery 210 Windows, powered 47
namic Driving Control 119 Vehicle battery, replac‐ Windshield washer fluid 73
Transmission, automatic 73 ing 210 Windshield washer noz‐
Transporting children Vehicle, breaking in 166 zles 72
safely 61 Vehicle care 219 Windshield washer sys‐
Tread, tires 189 Vehicle equipment 6 tem 71
Trip computer 89 Vehicle identification number, Windshield wiper 71
Triple turn signal activa‐ refer to Identification num‐ Windshield wipers, fold-out
tion 70 ber in the engine compart‐ position 72
Trip odometer 81 ment 193 Winter storage, care 221
Trunk lid 42 Vehicle jack 209 Winter tires, suitable
Trunk lid, emergency unlock‐ Vehicle paint 219 tires 191
ing 43 Vehicle storage 221 Winter tires, tread 190
Trunk lid, hotel function 43 Vehicle wash 218 Wiper blades, replacing 201
Trunk lid opening with no- Ventilation 149 Wiper fluid 73
touch activation 44 Ventilation, refer to Parked- Wiper system 71
Trunk lid via remote con‐ car ventilation 149 Wood, care 220
trol 40 Voice activation system 26 Word match concept, naviga‐
Turning circle lines, rearview tion 25
camera 136 W Working on the hybrid sys‐
Turn signals, operation 70 tem 216
Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐ Warning indicators 78 Wrench 201
placement 207 Warning lamps 78
Warning messages, refer to X
U Check Control 78
Warning triangle 213 Xenon headlamps, bulb re‐
Unintentional alarm 47 Washer fluid 73 placement 205
Units of measure 90 Washer nozzles, wind‐
Universal remote control 152 shield 72
Unlock button, automatic Washer system 71
transmission 74 Washing, vehicle 218
Unlocking/locking from in‐ Water, hybrid system 217
side 42 Water on roads 168
Unlocking/locking via door Weights 224
lock 41 Welcome lamps 93
Unlocking/locking with re‐ What to do after an acci‐
mote control 40 dent 217
Unlocking, settings 45 Wheel cleaner 220
234
More about BMW
The Ultimate Driving

bmwusa.com Machine
01 40 2 926 835 ue
*BL292683500F*

BMW F30 ActiveHybrid 3 Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BMW F30 ActiveHybrid 3 Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Contents Owner's Manual for

A-Z The Ultimate Driving

THE BMW ACTIVE HYBRID 3.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 835 - X/13

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 835 - X/13

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 835 - X/13

ADDENDUM TO BMW ACTIVE HYBRID

text beginning, “Have the work by your service center or a tire

Information about recommended 16. At page 199, under the heading:

thereof the following text should be

Use of recommended vehicle

The manufacturer of your vehicle

After a battery replacement, the

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 835 - X/13

User's manual for Navigation,

Reporting safety defects

For Canadian customers

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 835 - X/13

All around the steering wheel

1 Roller sunblinds 49 Active Blind Spot Detec‐

3 Power windows 47 Intelligent Safety 106

Front fog lamps 96 Reduce distance 126

Parking lamps 93 Increase distance 126

Low beams 93 Cruise control rocker switch 131, 125

7 Steering column stalk, left

High beams, head‐ Thumbwheel for selection lists 87

Roadside parking lamps 94 Rain sensor 71

Computer 87 Clean the windshields and head‐

8 Steering wheel buttons, left 12 Starting/stopping the engine,

Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐

All around the center console

1 Headliner 17 9 Parking brake 69

5 Glove compartment 160 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐

All around the headliner

1 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ 4 Reading lamps 96

2 Glass sunroof, powered 49 5 Interior lamps 96

3 Indicator lamp, front passenger

All standard, country-specific and optional Hints

Controls at a glance Switching on

1. Turn. Press the but‐ Function

TEL Opens the Telephone menu.

BACK Displays the previous panel.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

Controller without navigation system

3. Move in four directions.

MENU Open the main menu.

RADIO Opens the Radio menu.

MEDIA Opens the CD/Multimedia

NAV Opens the Navigation menu.

Buttons on controller Selecting menu items

Audio Open audio menu last lis‐

TEL Opens the Telephone menu.

BACK Open previous panel.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

2. Press the controller.

Operating concept Menu items in the Owner's Manual

Changing between panels

View of an opened menu

Entering letters and numbers

▷ For the input of upper/lower case letters Changing settings

Move interactive map Slide in the corre‐

Enlarge/shrink interac‐ Drag inwards or

Display the menu or Tap once.